Standard RLL and

Intelligent Box Chapter

Instructions 5
In This Chapter...
Introduction................................................................................................................ 5-2
Using Boolean Instructions........................................................................................ 5-4
Boolean Instructions................................................................................................... 5-9
Comparative Boolean............................................................................................... 5-25
Immediate Instructions............................................................................................ 5-31
Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions....................................................... 5-35
Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions......................................... 5-48
Logical Instructions (Accumulator).......................................................................... 5-60
Math Instructions..................................................................................................... 5-68
Bit Operation Instructions........................................................................................ 5-82
Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)..................................................... 5-87
Table Instructions..................................................................................................... 5-96
CPU Control Instructions.......................................................................................... 5-99
Program Control Instructions................................................................................ 5-101
Interrupt Instructions............................................................................................. 5-108
Message Instructions.............................................................................................. 5-111
Intelligent I/O Instructions..................................................................................... 5-118
Network Instructions.............................................................................................. 5-120
Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions......................................................................... 5-124
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Introduction
DL05 Micro PLCs offer a wide variety of instructions to perform many different types of
operations. This chapter shows you how to use each standard Relay Ladder Logic (RLL)
instruction. In addition to these instructions, you may also need to refer to the Drum instruction
in Chapter 6, or the Stage programming instructions in Chapter 7.
There are two ways to quickly find the instruction you need.
• If you know the instruction category (Boolean, Comparative Boolean, etc.) just use the
title at the top of the page to find the pages that discuss the instructions in that category.
• If you know the individual instruction name, use the following
table to find the page(s) that discusses the instruction.
Instruction Page Instruction Page
Accumulating Timer (TMRA) 5–38 Decode (DECO) 5–86
Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF) 5-38 Decrement (DEC) 5–76
Add (ADD) 5–68 Decrement Binary (DECB) 5–77
Add Binary (ADDB) 5–78 Disable Interrupts (DISI) 5–109
Add Double (ADDD) 5–69 Divide (DIV) 5–74
And (AND) 5–13 Divide Binary (DIVB) 5–81
And (AND) 5–30 Divide Double (DIVD) 5–75
And (AND) 5–60 Enable Interrupts (ENI) 5–108
And Bit-of-Word (ANDB) 5-14 Encode (ENCO) 5–85
And Double (ANDD) 5–61 End (END) 5–99
And If Equal (ANDE) 5–27 Exclusive Or (XOR) 5–64
And If Not Equal (ANDNE) 5–27 Exclusive Or Double (XORD) 5–65
And Immediate (ANDI) 5–32 Fault (FAULT) 5–111
And Negative Differential (ANDND) 5–21 For / Next (FOR) (NEXT) 5–101
And Not (ANDN) 5–13 Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SBR) 5–103
And Not (ANDN) 5–30 Gray Code (GRAY) 5–93
And Not Bit-of-Word (ANDNB) 5-14 HEX to ASCII (HTA) 5–91
And Not Immediate (ANDNI) 5–32 Increment (INC) 5–76
And Positive Differential (ANDPD) 5–21 Increment Binary (INCB) 5–77
And Store (AND STR) 5–15 Interrupt (INT) 5–108
ASCII Constant (ACON) 5–112 Interrupt Return (IRT) 5–108
ASCII to HEX (ATH) 5–90 Interrupt Return Conditional (IRTC) 5–108
Binary (BIN) 5–87 Invert (INV) 5–89
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) 5–88 Load (LD) 5–53
Compare (CMP) 5–66 Load Address (LDA) 5–56
Compare Double (CMPD) 5–67 Load Double (LDD) 5–54
Counter (CNT) 5–41 Load Formatted (LDF) 5–55
Data Label (DLBL) 5–112 Load Label (LDLBL) 5–97

5-2 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Instruction Page Instruction Page
Master Line Reset (MLR) 5–106 Reset Bit-of-Word (RSTB) 5-23
Master Line Set (MLS) 5–106 Reset Immediate (RSTI) 5–34
Move (MOV) 5–96 Reset Watch Dog Timer (RSTWT) 5–100
Move Memory Cartridge (MOVMC) 5–97 Set (SET) 5–22
Multiply (MUL) 5–72 Set Bit-of-Word (SETB) 5-23
Multiply Binary (MULB) 5–80 Set Immediate (SETI) 5–34
Multiply Double (MULD) 5–73 Shift Left (SHFL) 5–83
No Operation (NOP) 5–99 Shift Register (SR) 5–47
Not (NOT) 5–18 Shift Right (SHFR) 5–84
Numerical Constant (NCON) 5–112 Shuffle Digits (SFLDGT) 5–94
Or (OR) 5–11 Stage Counter (SGCNT) 5–43
Or (OR) 5–29 Stop (STOP) 5–99
Or (OR) 5–62 Store (STR) 5–9
Or Bit-of-Word (ORB) 5-12 Store (STR) 5-28
Or Double (ORD) 5–63 Store Bit-of-Word (STRB) 5-10
Or If Equal (ORE) 5–26 Store If Equal (STRE) 5–25
Or If Not Equal (ORNE) 5–26 Store If Not Equal (STRNE) 5–25
Or Immediate (ORI) 5–31 Store Immediate (STRI) 5–31
Or Negative Differential (ORND) 5–20 Store Negative Differential (STRND) 5–19
Or Not (ORN) 5–11 Store Not (STRN) 5–9
Or Not (ORN) 5–29 Store Not (STRN) 5-28
Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORNB) 5-12 Store Not Bit-of-Word (STRNB) 5-10
Or Not Immediate (ORNI) 5–31 Store Not Immediate (STRNI) 5–31
Or Out (OR OUT) 5–16 Store Positive Differential (STRPD) 5–19
Or Out Immediate (OROUTI) 5–33 Subroutine Return (RT) 5–103
Or Positive Differential (ORPD) 5–20 Subroutine Return Conditional (RTC) 5–103
Or Store (OR STR) 5–15 Subtract (SUB) 5–70
Out (OUT) 5–16 Subtract Binary (SUBB) 5–79
Out (OUT) 5–57 Subtract Double (SUBD) 5–71
Out Bit-of-Word (OUTB) 5-17 Sum (SUM) 5–81
Out Double (OUTD) 5–57 Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF) 5–36
Out Formatted (OUTF) 5–58 Up Down Counter (UDC) 5–45
Out Immediate (OUTI) 5–33 Write to Intelligent Box I/O Module (WT) 5-119
Pause (PAUSE) 5–24 Write to Network (WX) 5–122
Pop (POP) 5–58
Positive Differential (PD) 5–18
Print Message (PRINT) 5–114
Read from Intelligent Box I/O Module (RD) 5-118
Read from Network (RX) 5–120
Reset (RST) 5–22

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-3
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Using Boolean Instructions

Do you ever wonder why so many PLC manufacturers always quote the scan time for a 1K
Boolean program? Simple. Most all programs utilize many Boolean instructions. These are
typically very simple instructions designed to join input and output contacts in various series
and parallel combinations. Our DirectSOFT software is a similar program. It uses graphic
symbols to develop a program; therefore, you don’t necessarily have to know the instruction
mnemonics in order to develop your program. However, knowledge of mnemonics will be
helpful, whenever it becomes necessary to troubleshoot a program using a handheld programmer
(HPP).
Many of the instructions in this chapter are not program instructions used in DirectSOFT, but
are implied. In other words, they are not actually keyboard commands, however, they can be
seen in a Mnemonic View of the program once the DirectSOFT program has been developed
and accepted (compiled). Each instruction listed in this chapter will have a small chart to
indicate how the instruction is used with DirectSOFT and the HPP.
DS5 Implied
HPP Used

The following paragraphs show how these instructions are used to build simple ladder programs.

END Statement
All DL05 programs require an END statement as the last instruction. This tells the CPU that
this is the end of the program. Normally, any instructions placed after the END statement will
not be executed. There are exceptions to this such as interrupt routines, etc.. This chapter will
discuss the instruction set in detail.

X0 Y0
OUT
All programs must have
an END statement

END

Simple Rungs
You use a contact to start rungs that contain both contacts and coils. The boolean instruction
that does this is called a Store or, STR instruction. The output point is represented by the
Output or, OUT instruction. The following example shows how to enter a single contact and
a single output coil.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT Example Handheld Mnemonics

X0 Y0 STR X0
OUT Y0
OUT END

END

5-4 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Normally Closed Contact

Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished with the Store Not or,
STRN instruction. The following example shows a simple rung with a normally closed contact.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics
X0 Y0 STRN X0
OUT OUT Y0
END

END

Contacts in Series
Use the AND instruction to join two or more contacts in series. The following example shows
two contacts in series and a single output coil. The instructions used would be STR X0, AND
X1, followed by OUT Y0.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics

X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
AND X1
OUT OUT Y0
END

END

Midline Outputs
Sometimes it is necessary to use midline outputs to get additional outputs that are conditional
on other contacts. The following example shows how you can use the AND instruction to
continue a rung with more conditional outputs.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Example Handheld Mnemonics

X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
AND X1
OUT OUT Y0
AND X2
X2 Y1 OUT Y1
AND X3
OUT OUT Y2
END
X3 Y2
OUT

END

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-5
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Parallel Elements
You also have to join contacts in parallel. The OR instruction allows you to do this. The
following example shows two contacts in parallel and a single output coil. The instructions
would be STR X0, OR X1, followed by OUT Y0.

DirectSOFT 5 Handheld Mnemonics

X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
OUT AND X1
STR X2
X2 X3 AND X3
ORSTR
OUT Y0
END END

Joining Series Branches in Parallel

Quite often it is necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel. The Or Store
(ORSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network
consisting of series elements joined in parallel.
DirectSOFT 5 Handheld Mnemonics
X0 Y0 STR X0
OUT OR X1
OUT Y0
X1 END

END

Joining Parallel Branches in Series

You can also join one or more parallel branches in series. The And Store (ANDSTR) instruction
allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network with contact branches in
series with parallel contacts.
DirectSOFT 5 Handheld Mnemonics
X0 X1 Y0 STR X0
OUT STR X1
OR X2
X2 ANDSTR
OUT Y0
END
END
X0 X2 X5 Y0
Combination Networks OUT
You can combine the various types of
X1 X3 X4
series and parallel branches to solve most
any application problem. The following
X6
example shows a simple combination
network.
END

5-6 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean
Some PLC manufacturers make it really difficult to do a simple comparison of two numbers.
Some of them require you to move the data all over the place before you can actually perform
the comparison. The DL05 Micro PLCs provide Comparative Boolean instructions that allow
you to quickly and easily solve this problem. The Comparative Boolean provides evaluation
of two 4-digit values using boolean contacts. The valid evaluations are: equal to, not equal to,
equal to or greater than, and less than.
In this example when the value in V-memory location
V1400 K1234 Y3
V1400 is equal to the constant value 1234, Y3 will
OUT
energize.

Boolean Stack
There are limits to how many elements you can include in a rung. This is because the DL05
PLCs use an 8-level boolean stack to evaluate the various logic elements. The boolean stack is
a temporary storage area that solves the logic for the rung. Each time the program encounters a
STR instruction, the instruction is placed on the top of the stack. Any other STR instructions
already on the boolean stack are pushed down a level. The ANDSTR, and ORSTR instructions
combine levels of the boolean stack when they are encountered. An error will occur during
program compilation if the CPU encounters a rung that uses more than the eight levels of the
boolean stack.
The following example shows how the boolean stack is used to solve boolean logic.
X0 X1 ORSTR AND X4 Y0
STR
STR OUT Output

X2 AND X3
STR ANDSTR

X5 OR

STR X0 STR X1 STR X2 AND X3

1 STR X0 1 STR X1 1 STR X2 1 X2 AND X3
2 2 STR X0 2 2 STR X1
STR X1
3 3 3 STR X0 3 STR X0
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8

ORSTR AND X4 ORNOT X5

1 X1 or (X2 AND X3) 1 X4 AND {X1 or (X2 AND X3)} 1 NOT X5 OR X4 AND {X1 OR (X2 AND X3)}
2 STR X0 2 STR X0 2
STR X0
3 3 3
. . .
. . .

8 8 8

ANDSTR
1 XO AND (NOT X5 or X4) AND {X1 or (X2 AND X3)}
2
3

.
.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-7
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Boolean
The DL05 Micro PLCs can usually complete an operation cycle in a matter of milliseconds.
However, in some applications you may not be able to wait a few milliseconds until the next
I/O update occurs. The DL05 PLCs offer Immediate input and outputs which are special
boolean instructions that allow reading directly from inputs and writing directly to outputs
during the program execution portion of the CPU cycle. You may recall that this is normally
done during the input or output update portion of the CPU cycle. The immediate instructions
take longer to execute because the program execution is interrupted while the CPU reads or
writes the I/O point. This function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write
outputs portion of the CPU cycle.
NOTE: Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status from the input point,
it only uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use the new status to update the image
register. Therefore, any regular instructions that follow will still use the image register values. Any immediate
instructions that follow will access the I/O again to update the status. The immediate output instruction will
write the status to the I/O and update the image register.

CPU Scan

The CPU reads the inputs from the local

base and stores the status in an input
Read Inputs image register.

X11 ... X2 X1 X0
OFF ... ON OFF OFF ON X0
Input Image Register
OFF X1

Read Inputs from Specialty I/O

Solve the Application Program

Immediate instruction does not use the
input image register, but instead reads
X0 Y0 the status from the module immediately.
I I/O Point X0 Changes

ON X0
OFF X1
Write Outputs

Write Outputs to Specialty I/O

Diagnostics

5-8 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Boolean Instructions
Store (STR)
The Store instruction begins a new rung or an additional
DS5 Implied Aaaa
branch in a rung with a normally open contact. Status of the
HPP Used
contact will be the same state as the associated image register
point or memory location.
Store Not (STRN)
DS5 Implied The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an Aaaa
HPP Used additional branch in a rung with a normally closed contact.
Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the
associated image register point or memory location.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
Outputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter C⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Special Relay⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠SP 0–777

In the following Store example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2

In the following Store Not example, when input X1 is off output Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 SP B ENT
OUT STRN 1
GX C ENT
OUT 2

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-9
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Store Bit-of-Word (STRB)

DS5 Implied The Store Bit-of-Word instruction begins a new rung or an
HPP Used additional branch in a rung with a normally open contact. Status Aaaa.bb
of the contact will be the same state as the bit referenced in the
associated memory location.
Store Not Bit-of-Word (STRNB)
DS5 Implied Aaaa.bb
The Store Not Bit-of-Word instruction begins a new rung or
HPP Used an additional branch in a rung with a normally closed contact.
Status of the contact will be opposite the state of the bit
referenced in the associated memory location.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A aaa bb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ B See memory map BCD, 0 to 15
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ PB See memory map BCD, 0 to 15

In the following Store Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400 is on,
output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32

B1400.12 Y2

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 1 2 ENT

OUT 2 ENT

In the following Store Not Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400
is off, output Y2 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
B1400.12 Y2

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STRN SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 1 2 ENT

OUT 2 ENT

5-10 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or (OR)
DS5 Implied The Or instruction logically ors a normally open contact
HPP Used in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of the Aaaa
contact will be the same state as the associated image register
point or memory location.
Or Not (ORN)
DS5 Implied The Or Not instruction logically ors a normally closed
HPP Used contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status Aaaa
of the contact will be opposite the state of the associated
image register point or memory location.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177
Special Relay ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠SP 0–777

In the following Or example, when input X1 or X2 is on, output Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
Q C ENT
OR 2
X2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

In the following Or Not example, when input X1 is on or X2 is off, output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
R C ENT
ORN 2
X2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-11
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Bit-of-Word (ORB)
The Or Bit-of-Word instruction logically ors a normally
DS5 Implied open contact in parallel with another contact in a rung.
HPP Used Status of the contact will be the same state as the bit Aaaa.bb
referenced in the associated memory location.
Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORNB)
The Or Not Bit-of-Word instruction logically ors a
DS5 Implied normally closed contact in parallel with another contact
HPP Used Aaaa.bb
in a rung. Status of the contact will be opposite the state
of the bit referenced in the associated memory location.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A aaa bb
V-memory⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ B See memory map BCD, 0 to 15
Pointer⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ PB See memory map BCD, 0 to 15

In the following Or Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is on, output Y7
will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32

X1 Y7

OUT

B1400.7

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 1 ENT

OR SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 7 ENT

OUT 7 ENT

In the following Or Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on or bit 7 of V1400 is off, output
Y7 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32

X1 Y7

OUT

B1400.7

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 1 ENT

ORN SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 7 ENT

OUT 7 ENT

5-12 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And (AND)
DS5 Implied The And instruction logically ands a normally open Aaaa
HPP Used contact in series with another contact in a rung.
The status of the contact will be the same state as the
associated image register point or memory location.
And Not (ANDN)
Aaaa
DS5 Implied The And Not instruction logically ands a normally
HPP Used closed contact in series with another contact in a rung.
The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the
associated image register point or memory location.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177
Special Relay ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠SP 0–777

In the following And example, when input X1 and X2 are on output Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
V C ENT
AND 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

In the following And Not example, when input X1 is on and X2 is off output Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
W C ENT
ANDN 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-13
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Bit-of-Word (ANDB)

DS5 Implied The And Bit-of-Word instruction logically ands a
Aaaa.bb
HPP Used normally open contact in series with another contact in
a rung. The status of the contact will be the same state
as the bit referenced in the associated memory location.
And Not Bit-of-Word (ANDNB)
DS5 Implied The And Not Bit-of-Word instruction logically ands a
HPP Used normally closed contact in series with another contact Aaaa.bb
in a rung. The status of the contact will be opposite
the state of the bit referenced in the associated memory
location.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A aaa bb
V-memory⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ B See memory map BCD, 0 to 15
Pointer⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ PB See memory map BCD, 0 to 15

In the following And Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 and bit 4 of V1400 is on output
Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT 5

X1 B1400.4 Y5

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 1 ENT

AND SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 4 ENT

OUT 5 ENT

In the following And Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on and bit 4 of V1400 is
off output Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT 5

X1 B1400.4 Y5

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 1 ENT

ANDN SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 4 ENT

OUT 5 ENT

5-14 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Store (AND STR)

DS5 Implied The And Store instruction logically ands two OUT
HPP Used branches of a rung in series. Both branches must
1 2
begin with the Store instruction.

Or Store (OR STR) 1

DS5 Implied The Or Store instruction logically ors two OUT

HPP Used branches of a rung in parallel. Both branches must
2
begin with the Store instruction.

In the following And Store example, the branch

consisting of contacts X2, X3, and X4 have been anded with the branch consisting of contact
X1.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 X2 X3 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
$ C ENT
STR 2
X4
V D
ENT
AND 3
Q E
ENT
OR 4
L ENT
ANDST
GX F ENT
OUT 5

In the following Or Store example, the branch consisting of X1 and X2 have been ORed with
the branch consisting of X3 and X4.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
V C
ENT
AND 2
X3 X4
$ D ENT
STR 3
V E ENT
AND 4
M ENT
ORST
GX F ENT
OUT 5

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-15
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out (OUT)
The Out instruction reflects the status of the rung (on/off) and outputs Aaaa
DS5 Used the discrete (on/off) state to the specified image register point or memory OUT
HPP Used location.
Multiple Out instructions referencing the same discrete location should
not be used since only the last Out instruction in the program will control the physical output
point. Instead, use the next instruction, the Or Out.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777

In the following Out example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 and Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2
Y5
GX F ENT
OUT OUT 5

DS5 Used Or Out (OROUT)

HPP Used
The Or Out instruction allows more than one rung of discrete logic to A aaa
control a single output. Multiple Or Out instructions referencing the OR OUT
same output coil may be used, since all contacts controlling the output
are logically ORed together. If the status of any rung is on, the output will
also be on.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–177
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–177
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777

In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Y2
$ B ENT
OR OUT STR 1
O D F ENT ENT C ENT
INST# 3 5 2
$ E ENT
STR 4
X4 Y2 O D F C
ENT ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 2
OR OUT

5-16 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Bit-of-Word (OUTB)

DS5 Used The Out Bit-of-Word instruction reflects the status of the rung (on/
HPP Used off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) state to the specified bit in the Aaaa.bb
referenced memory location. Multiple Out Bit-of-Word instructions OUT
referencing the same bit of the same word generally should not be used
since only the last Out instruction in the program will control the status
of the bit.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa bb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠B See memory map BCD, 0 to 15
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠PB See memory map BCD, 0 to 15

In the following Out Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on, bit 3 of V1400 and bit 6 of
V1401 will turn on.
DirectSOFT 5

X1 B1400.3

OUT

B1401.6

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 1 ENT

OUT SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 3 ENT

OUT SHFT B V 1 4 0 1

K 6 ENT

The following Out Bit-of-Word example contains two Out Bit-of-Word instructions using the
same bit in the same memory word. The final state bit 3 of V1400 is ultimately controlled by
the last rung of logic referencing it. X1 will override the logic state controlled by X0. To avoid
this situation, multiple outputs using the same location must not be used in programming.

location must not be used in programming.

X0 B1400.3

OUT

X1 B1400.3

OUT

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-17
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Not (NOT)
DS5 Used The Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at
HPP Used the point of the instruction.
In the following example when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. This is because the Not instruction
inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
SHFT N O T ENT
TMR INST# MLR
GX C ENT
OUT 2

NOTE: DirectSOFT Release 1.1i and later supports the use of the NOT instruction. The above example rung
is merely intended to show the visual representation of the NOT instruction. The rung cannot be created or
displayed in DirectSOFT versions earlier than 1.1i.

Positive Differential (PD)

The Positive Differential instruction is typically
DS5 Used A aaa
known as a one shot. When the input logic produces
HPP Used an off to on transition, the output will energize for PD
one CPU scan.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777

In the following example, every time X1 makes an off to on transition, C0 will energize for
one scan.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 C0 $ B ENT
STR 1
PD
SHFT P SHFT D A ENT
CV 3 0

5-18 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Store Positive Differential (STRPD)

DS5 Used The Store Positive Differential instruction begins a
HPP Used new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a
normally open contact. The contact closes for one Aaaa
CPU scan when the state of the associated image
register point makes an Off-to-On transition.
Thereafter, the contact remains open until the next
Off-to-On transition (the symbol inside the contact
represents the transition). This function is sometimes
called a “one-shot”. This contact will also close on a
program-to-run transition if it is within a retentative
range and on before the PLC mode transition.
Store Negative Differential (STRND)
DS5 Used The Store Negative Differential instruction begins
HPP Used a new rung or an additional branch in a rung with
a normally closed contact. The contact closes for Aaaa
one CPU scan when the state of the associated
image register point makes an On-to-Off transition.
Thereafter, the contact remains open until the next
On-to-Off transition (the symbol inside the contact
represents the transition).

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177

In the following example, each time X1 is makes an Off-to-On transition, Y4 will energize for
one scan.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT32
X1 $ SHFT P D B ENT
Y4 STR CV 3 1
OUT GX E ENT
OUT 4

In the following example, each time X1 is makes an On-to-Off transition, Y4 will energize for
one scan.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 $ SHFT N D B ENT
Y4 STR TMR 3 1
OUT GX E
ENT
OUT 4

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-19
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Positive Differential (ORPD)

DS5 Implied The Or Positive Differential instruction logically ors a contact
HPP Used in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of the
contact will be open until the associated image register point Aaaa
makes an Off-to-On transition, closing it for one CPU scan.
Thereafter, it remains open until another Off-to-On transition.
Or Negative Differential (ORND)
The Or Negative Differential instruction logically ors a
DS5 Implied contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status
HPP Used of the contact will be open until the associated image register Aaaa
point makes an On-to-Off transition, closing it for one CPU
scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another On-to-Off
transition.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177

In the following example, Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2
transitions from Off to On.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q SHFT P D C ENT
OR CV 3 2
X2 GX F
ENT
OUT 5

In the following example, Y 5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2
transitions from On to Off.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q N D C
SHFT ENT
OR TMR 3 2
X2 GX F
ENT
OUT 5

5-20 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Positive Differential (ANDPD)

DS5 Implied The And Positive Differential instruction logically ands
HPP Used a contact in series with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be open until the associated Aaaa
image register point makes an Off-to-On transition,
closing it for one CPU scan. Thereafter, it remains open
until another Off-to-On transition.
And Negative Differential (ANDND)
DS5 Implied The And Negative Differential instruction logically ands
HPP Used a contact in series with another contact in a rung. The Aaaa
status of the contact will be open until the associated
image register point makes an On-to-Off transition,
closing it for one CPU scan. Thereafter, it remains open
until another On-to-Off transition.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177

In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2
transitions from Off to On.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
X1 X2 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q SHFT P D C ENT
OR CV 3 2
GX F
ENT
OUT 5

In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2
transitions from On to Off.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X2 $ B ENT
X1 Y5 STR 1
OUT Q N D C
SHFT ENT
OR TMR 3 2
GX F
ENT
OUT 5

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-21
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Set (SET)
DS5 Used
The Set instruction sets or turns on an image register Optional
memory range
HPP Used
point/memory location or a consecutive range of image
A aaa aaa
register points/memory locations. Once the point/
SET
location is set it will remain on until it is reset using
the Reset instruction. It is not necessary for the input
controlling the Set instruction to remain on.
Reset (RST)
Optional
DS5 Used The Reset instruction resets or turns off an image register Memory. range

HPP Used point/memory location or a range of image registers A aaa aaa

points/memory locations. Once the point/location is reset RST
it is not necessary for the input to remain on.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177

In the following example when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

DirectSOFT
X1 $ B
Y2 Y5 ENT
STR 1
SET
X C F ENT
SET 2 5

In the following example when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be reset or de–energized.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X2 $ B
Y2 Y5 ENT
STR 1
RST
S C F ENT
RST 2 5

5-22 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Set Bit-of-Word (SETB)

DS5 Used The Set Bit-of-Word instruction sets or turns on a bit in a Aaaa.bb
HPP Used V-memory location. Once the bit is set it will remain on until it
SET
is reset using the Reset Bit-of-Word instruction. It is not necessary
for the input controlling the Set Bit-of-Word instruction to remain
on.
Reset Bit-of-Word (RSTB)
A aaa.bb
DS5 Used The Reset Bit-of-Word instruction resets or turns off a bit in a RST
HPP Used V-memory location. Once the bit is reset it is not necessary for the
input to remain on.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa bb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠B See memory map BCD, 0 to 15
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠PB See memory map BCD, 0 to 15

In the following example when X1 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is set to the on state.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32

X1
B1400.1
SET

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 1 ENT

SET SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 1 ENT

In the following example when X2 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is reset to the off state.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32

X2
B1400.1
RST

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR 2 ENT

RST SHFT B V 1 4 0 0

K 1 ENT

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-23
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Pause (PAUSE)
DS5 Used The Pause instruction disables the output update on a
HPP Used range of outputs. The ladder program will continue to Y aaa aaa
run and update the image register. However, the outputs PAUSE
in the range specified in the Pause instruction will be
turned off at the output points.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

aaa
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377

In the following example, when X1 is ON, Y5-Y7 will be turned OFF. The execution of the
ladder program will not be affected.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32

X1 Y5 Y7

PAUSE

Since the D2–HPP Handheld Programmer does not have a specific Pause key, you can use the
corresponding instruction number for entry (#960), or type each letter of the command.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1
O J G A ENT ENT D F ENT
INST# 9 6 0 3 5

In some cases, you may want certain output points in the specified pause range to operate
normally. In that case, use Aux 58 to over-ride the Pause instruction.

5-24 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Comparative Boolean
Store If Equal (STRE)
The Store If Equal instruction begins a new rung or
DS5 Used
additional branch in a rung with a normally open V aaa B bbb
HPP Used
comparative contact. The contact will be on when
Vaaa is equal toBbbb .
Store If Not Equal (STRNE)
DS5 Used The Store If Not Equal instruction begins a new rung V aaa B bbb
HPP Used or additional branch in a rung with a normally closed
comparative contact. The contact will be on when
Vaaa does not equal Bbbb.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠B aaa bbb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 4933, Y3 will
energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000 K4933 Y3 $ SHFT E C A A A

STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
E J D D ENT
4 9 3 3
GX D ENT
OUT 3

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 is not equal to 5060,
Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT32

Y3 SP SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K5060
STRN 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A G A ENT
5 0 6 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-25
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or If Equal (ORE)
DS5 Implied The Or If Equal instruction connects a normally open
comparative contact in parallel with another contact. V aaa B bbb
HPP Used
The contact will be on when Vaaa is equal to Bbbb.
Or If Not Equal (ORNE)
DS5 Implied The Or If Not Equal instruction connects a normally
HPP Used closed comparative contact in parallel with another V aaa B bbb
contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa does not
equal Bbbb.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠B aaa bbb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 4500 or
V2002 = 2345 , Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K4500 Y3
STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
E F A A ENT
4 5 0 0

V2002 K2345 Q SHFT E C A A C

OR 4 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 3916 or
V2002 is not equal to 2500, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K3916 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT D J B G ENT
3 9 1 6

V2002 K2500 R SHFT E C A A C

ORN 4 2 0 0 2
C F A A ENT
2 5 0 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

5-26 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And If Equal (ANDE)

DS5 Implied The And If Equal instruction connects a normally V aaa B bbb
HPP Used open comparative contact in series with another
contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa is equal
to Bbbb.
And If Not Equal (ANDNE)
The And If Not Equal instruction connects a V aaa B bbb
DS5 Implied
HPP Used normally closed comparative contact in series with
another contact. The contact will be on when
Vaaa does not equal Bbbb

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000 and
V2002 = 2345, Y3 will energize.

DirectSOFT 5 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345 Y3 $ SHFT E C A A A

STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A A A ENT
5 0 0 0
V SHFT E C A A C
AND 4 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 2550 and V2002
does not equal 2345, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT 5 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345 Y3 $ SHFT E C A A A

STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A A A ENT
5 0 0 0
V SHFT E C A A C
AND 4 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-27
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Store (STR)
A aaa B bbb
DS5 Used The Comparative Store instruction begins a new rung or
HPP Used additional branch in a rung with a normally open comparative
contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater
than Bbbb.
Store Not (STRN) A aaa B bbb
DS5 Used The Comparative Store Not instruction begins a new rung or
HPP Used additional branch in a rung with a normally closed comparative
contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa is less than Bbbb.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Pointer⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ p All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 M 1000, Y3 will
energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000 K1000 Y3 $ SHFT V C A A A

STR AND 2 0 0 0
OUT
B A A A ENT
1 0 0 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 < 4050, Y3 will
energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000 K4050 Y3 SP SHFT V C A A A

STRN AND 2 0 0 0
OUT
E A F A ENT
4 0 5 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

5-28 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or (OR)
DS5 Implied The Comparative Or instruction connects a normally
A aaa B bbb
HPP Used open comparative contact in parallel with another
contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or
greater than Bbbb.
Or Not (ORN)
DS5 Implied The Comparative Or Not instruction connects A aaa B bbb
HPP Used a normally open comparative contact in parallel
with another contact. The contact will be on when
Aaaa is less than Bbbb.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Pointer⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ p All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 6045 or
V2002 M 2345, Y3 will energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K6045 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT G A E F ENT
6 0 4 5

V2002 K2345 Q SHFT V C A A C

OR AND 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3

In the following example when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 1000 or
V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K1000 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT B A A A ENT
1 0 0 0
R SHFT V C A A C
V2002 K2500 ORN AND 2 0 0 2
C F A A ENT
2 5 0 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-29
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And (AND)
DS5 Implied The Comparative And instruction connects a normally A aaa B bbb
HPP Used open comparative contact in series with another contact.
The contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater
than Bbbb.
And Not (ANDN) A aaa B bbb
DS5 Implied The Comparative And Not instruction connects a
HPP Used normally open comparative contact in parallel with
another contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa is less than Bbbb.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Pointer⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ p All (See page 3–28) All (See page 3–28)
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000, and
V2002 M 2345, Y3 will energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

V2000 K5000 V2002 K2345 Y3 $ SHFT E C A A A

STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT
F A A A ENT
5 0 0 0
V SHFT V C A A C
AND AND 2 0 0 2
C D E F ENT
2 3 4 5
GX D ENT
OUT 3

In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 7000 and
V2002 < 050, Y3 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ SHFT E C A A A
V2000 K7000 V2002 K2500 Y3 STR 4 2 0 0 0
OUT H A A A ENT
7 0 0 0
W SHFT V C A A C
ANDN AND 2 0 0 2
C F A A ENT
2 5 0 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3

5-30 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Immediate Instructions
Store Immediate (STRI)
The Store Immediate instruction begins a new rung or X aaa
DS5 Used
additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact will be
HPP Used
the same as the status of the associated input point at the time
the instruction is executed. The image register is not updated.
Store Not Immediate (STRNI)
The Store Not Immediate instruction begins a new rung or
additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact will be X aaa
DS5 Used
HPP Used opposite the status of the associated input point at the time the
instruction is executed. The image register is not updated.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377

In the following example when X1 is on, Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Y2 $ SHFT I B ENT
STR 8 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2

In the following example when X1 is off, Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y2 SP I B
SHFT ENT
STRN 8 1
OUT
GX C ENT
OUT 2

Or Immediate (ORI)
DS5 Implied The Or Immediate connects two contacts in parallel. The X aaa
HPP Used status of the contact will be the same as the status of the
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.
Or Not Immediate (ORNI)
DS5 Implied The Or Not Immediate connects two contacts in parallel. X aaa
HPP Used The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-31
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
OR Immediate Instructions (cont’d)
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377

In the following example, when X1 or X2 is on, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
Q SHFT I C ENT
X2 OR 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

In the following example, when X1 is on or X2 is off, Y5 will energize.

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
X1 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
R SHFT I C ENT
X2 ORN 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

And Immediate (ANDI)

DS5 Implied The And Immediate connects two contacts in series. The status
X aaa
HPP Used of the contact will be the same as the status of the associated
input point at the time the instruction is executed. The image
register is not updated.
And Not Immediate (ANDNI)
X aaa
DS5 Implied The And Not Immediate connects two contacts in series.
HPP Used The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377
In the following example, when X1 and X2 are on, Y5 will energize.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
OUT STR 1
V SHFT I C ENT
AND 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

In the following example, when X1 is on and X2 is off, Y5 will energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 X2 Y5 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUT
W SHFT I C ENT
ANDN 8 2
GX F ENT
OUT 5

5-32 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Immediate (OUTI)

The Out Immediate instruction reflects the status of the
DS5 Used rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) status to
HPP Used the specified module output point and the image register Y aaa
at the time the instruction is executed. If multiple Out
OUTI
Immediate instructions referencing the same discrete
point are used it is possible for the module output status
to change multiple times in a CPU scan. See Or Out
Immediate.
Or Out Immediate (OROUTI)
DS5 Used The Or Out Immediate instruction has been designed
HPP Used to use more than 1 rung of discrete logic to control a
single output. Multiple Or Out Immediate instructions Y aaa
referencing the same output coil may be used, since all OROUTI
contacts controlling the output are ored together. If
the status of any rung is on at the time the instruction is
executed, the output will also be on.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377

In the following example, when X1 is on, output point Y2 on the output module will turn
on. For instruction entry on the Handheld Programmer, you can use the instruction number
(#350) as shown, or type each letter of the command.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 Y2 $ B ENT
STR 1
OUTI
O D F A ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
2

In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
X1 Y2
STR 1
OR OUTI O D F A ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
X4 Y2 2
OR OUTI $ E ENT
STR 4
O D F A ENT ENT
INST# 3 5 0
C ENT
2

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-33
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Set Immediate (SETI)

DS5 Used
The Set Immediate instruction immediately sets, or
HPP Used
turns on an output or a range of outputs in the image
register and the corresponding output point(s) at the Y aaa aaa
time the instruction is executed. Once the outputs are SETI
set it is not necessary for the input to remain on. The
Reset Immediate instruction can be used to reset the
outputs.
Reset Immediate (RSTI)
DS5 Used The Reset Immediate instruction immediately resets,
HPP Used or turns off an output or a range of outputs in the Y aaa aaa
image register and the output point(s) at the time the RSTI
instruction is executed. Once the outputs are reset it is
not necessary for the input to remain on.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be set on in the image register
and on the corresponding output points.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
X1 Y2 Y5 STR 1
SETI X I C F
SHFT ENT
SET 8 2 5

In the following example, when X1 is on, Y5 through Y22 will be reset (off) in the image
register and on the corresponding output module(s).
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 Y5 Y22
$ B ENT
RSTI STR 1
S SHFT I F C C ENT
RST 8 5 2 2

5-34 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions

Using Timers
Timers are used to time an event for a desired length of time. The single input timer will time
as long as the input is on. When the input changes from on to off the timer current value is
reset to 0. There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth of a second timer available with a
maximum time of 999.9 and 99.99 seconds respectively. There is a discrete bit associated with
each timer to indicate that the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. The
timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input, associated discrete bit,
current value, and timer preset.

Seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X1
TMR T1
X1 K30

Timer Preset
T1
T1 Y0
OUT
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
Value 1/10 Seconds

There are those applications that need an accumulating timer, meaning it has the ability to
time, stop, and then resume from where it previously stopped. The accumulating timer works
similarly to the regular timer, but two inputs are required. The start/stop input starts and stops
the timer. When the timer stops, the elapsed time is maintained. When the timer starts again,
the timing continues from the elapsed time. When the reset input is turned on, the elapsed
time is cleared and the timer will start at 0 when it is restarted. There is a tenth of a second and
a hundredth of a second timer available with a maximum time of 9999999.9 and 999999.99
seconds respectively. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer
input, timer reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and timer preset.

Seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X1
TMRA T0
K30
X1 Enable

X2
X2

Reset Input
T0

Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
Value 1/10 Seconds

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-35
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF)

DS5 Used The Timer instruction is a 0.1 second single input timer
TMR T aaa
HPP Used that times to a maximum of 999.9 seconds. The Timer Fast B bbb
instruction is a 0.01 second single input timer that times up
to a maximum of 99.99 seconds. These timers will be enabled
Preset Timer#
if the input logic is true (on) and will be reset to 0 if the input
logic is false (off).
Instruction Specifications
TMRF T aaa
Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the timer number. B bbb

Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory

location. Preset Timer#

Current Value: Timer current values (BCD) are accessed

by referencing the associated V or T memory location*. For The timer discrete status bit and the
example, the timer current value for T3 physically resides in current value are not specified in the
timer instruction
V-memory location V3 as a BCD value.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is referenced by
the associated T memory location. Operating as a “timer
done bit”, it will be on if the current value is equal to or
greater than the preset value. For example, the discrete status
bit for Timer 2 is TA2.

NOTE: Timer preset constants (K) may be changed by using a handheld programmer, even when the CPU
is in Run Mode. Therefore, a V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program must change the
preset.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
Timers ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177 ––
1200–7377
V-memory for preset values ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V ––
7400–7577*
1200–7377
Pointers (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P ––
7400–7577
Constants (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999
Timer discrete status bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠T/V 0–177 or V41100–41107
Timer current values ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V /T** 0–177

NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used.

** With the HPP, both the Timer discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data
reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and
“TA2” for the current value of Timer T2.

You can perform functions when the timer reaches the specified preset using the discrete status
bit. Or, use comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals, based on one
timer. The examples on the following page show these two methods of programming timers.

5-36 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 3 seconds. The timer
discrete status bit (T2) will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds. The timer is reset
when X1 turns off, turns off the discrete status bit and resets the timer current value to 0.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Timing Diagram
X1 Seconds
TMR T2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K30

X1
T2 Y0

OUT
T2

Y0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
$ B ENT Value
STR 1
N C D A ENT
TMR 2 3 0
$ SHFT T C ENT
STR MLR 2
GX A ENT
OUT 0

Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds. Comparative
contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one second intervals respectively. When X1 is
turned off the timer will be reset to 0 and the comparative contacts will turn off Y3, Y4, and Y5.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Timing Diagram
X1 Seconds
TMR T20
K45 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Y3 X1
TA20 K10
OUT
Y3

TA20 K20 Y4 Y4
OUT
Y5

TA20 K30 Y5
T2
OUT
Current 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0
Value

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1
N C A E F ENT
TMR 2 0 4 5
$ SHFT T C A B A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 1 0
GX D ENT
OUT 3
$ SHFT T C A C A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 2 0
GX E ENT
OUT 4
$ SHFT T C A D A ENT
STR MLR 2 0 3 0
GX F ENT
OUT 5

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-37
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulating Timer (TMRA) Enable TMRA T aaa

B bbb
DS5 Used The Accumulating Timer is a 0.1 second two input timer that
HPP Used will time to a maximum of 9999999.9. Reset

Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF)

Timer#
DS5 Used The Accumulating Fast Timer is a 0.01 second two-input timer Preset
HPP Used that will time to a maximum of 99999.99. Each one uses two
timer registers in V-memory. These timers have two inputs, an
enable and a reset. The timer starts timing when the enable
is on and stops when the enable is off (without resetting the Enable TMRAF T aaa
count). The reset will reset the timer when on and allow the B bbb
timer to time when off. Reset
Instruction Specifications
Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the timer number. Preset Timer#
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory
location.
The timer discrete status bit
Current Value: Timer current values (BCD) are accessed and the current value are
by referencing the associated V or T memory location*. For not specified in the timer
example, the timer current value for T3 resides in V-memory instruction
location V3 as a BCD value.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory
location. Operating as a “timer done bit”, it will be on if the current value is equal to or greater
than the preset value. For example the discrete status bit for timer 2 would be T2.
NOTE: The accumulating type timer uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the 8-digit value, and
therefore two consecutive timer locations. For example, if TMR 1 is used, the next available timer number
is TMR 3.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
Timers ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–176 ––
V-memory for preset values ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V –– 1200–7377/7400–7577*
Pointers (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P –– 1200–7377/7400–7577
Constants (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–99999999
Timer discrete status bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠T/V 0–176 or V41100–41107
Timer current values ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V /T** 0–176

NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used.

** With the HPP, both the Timer discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data
reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and
“TA2” for the current value of Timer T2.

The following examples show two methods of programming timers. One performs functions
when the timer reaches the preset value using the discrete status bit, or use comparative contacts
to perform functions at different time intervals.

5-38 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits
In the following example, a two input timer (accumulating timer) is used with a preset of 3
seconds. The timer discrete status bit (T6) will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds.
Notice in this example that the timer times for 1 second, stops for one second, then resumes
timing. The timer will reset when C10 turns on, turning the discrete status bit off and resetting
the timer current value to 0.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Timing Diagram
X1 Seconds
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TMRA T6

X1
K30
C10
C10

Y7 T6
T6
OUT Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
Value

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

$ B ENT D A ENT
STR 1 3 0
$ SHFT C B A ENT $ SHFT T G ENT
STR 2 1 0 STR MLR 6
N SHFT A G GX B A ENT
TMR 0 6 OUT 1 0

Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, a single input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds. Comparative
contacts are used to energized Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one second intervals respectively. The
comparative contacts will turn off when the timer is reset.
Contacts
DirectSOFT
Timing Diagram
X1
Seconds
TMRA T20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

K45 X1
C10

C10

TA20 K10 TA21 K0 Y3

Y3
OUT

Y4
TA21 K1

Y5

TA20 K20 TA21 K0 Y4

T20
OUT
Current 0 10 10 20 30 40 50 0
TA21 K1 Value

1/10 Seconds

TA20 K30 TA21 K1 Y5

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont’d)

$ B ENT $ T C A C A
SHFT ENT
STR 1 STR MLR 2 0 2 0
$ C B A V E T C B A
SHFT ENT SHFT SHFT ENT
STR 2 1 0 AND 4 MLR 2 1 0
N A C A E F Q E T C B B
SHFT ENT SHFT SHFT ENT
TMR 0 2 0 4 5 OR 4 MLR 2 1 1
$ SHFT T C A B A ENT GX E ENT
STR MLR 2 0 1 0 OUT 4
V E T C B A $ T C A D A
SHFT SHFT ENT SHFT ENT
AND 4 MLR 2 1 0 STR MLR 2 0 3 0
Q E T C B B V E T C B B
SHFT SHFT ENT SHFT SHFT ENT
OR 4 MLR 2 1 1 AND 4 MLR 2 1 1
GX D ENT GX F ENT
OUT 3 OUT 5

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-39
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Using Counters
Counters are used to count events. The counters available are up counters, up/down counters,
and stage counters (used with RLLPLUS programming).
The up counter has two inputs, a count input and a reset input. The maximum count value is
9999. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the counter input, counter
reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and counter preset.

X1
CNT CT1
X1
Up K3
X2
X2
Reset
CT1
Current 1 2 3 4 0 Counter preset
alue
Counts

The up down counter has three inputs, a count up input, count down input and reset input.
The maximum count value is 99999999. The timing diagram below shows the relationship
between the counter input, counter reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and counter
preset.

X1
X1 UDC CT2
Up K3

X2 X2

X3
Down
X3

CT2
Reset
Current 1 2 1 2 3 0
Value Counts
Counter Preset

The stage counter has a count input and is reset by the RST instruction. This instruction is
useful when programming using the RLLPLUS structured programming. The maximum count
value is 9999. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the counter input,
associated discrete bit, current value, counter preset and reset instruction.

X1 X1
SGCNT CT2
K3
CT2

Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value Counts Counter preset
RST
CT2

5-40 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Counter (CNT)
Counter#
DS5 Used
The Counter is a two input counter that increments
HPP Used
when the count input logic transitions from off to on.
When the counter reset input is on the counter resets to Count CNT CT aaa
0. When the current value equals the preset value, the B bbb
counter status bit comes on and the counter continues to Reset
count up to a maximum count of 9999. The maximum
value will be held until the counter is reset.
Instruction Specifications Preset

Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter The counter discrete status bit and the
number. current value are not specified in the
counter instruction.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a
V-memory location as a BCD value.
Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT
memory locations*. The V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For example, the
counter current value for CT3 resides in V-memory location V1003 as a BCD value.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory
location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example the
discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
NOTE: Counter preset constants (K) may be changed by using a programming device, even when the CPU
is in Run Mode. Therefore, a V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program must change the
preset.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
Counters ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177 ––
1200–7377
V-memory (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V ––
7400–7577*
1200–7377
Pointers (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P ––
7400–7577
Constants (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999
Counter discrete status bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ CT/V 0–177 or V41140–41147
Counter current values ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V /CT** 0–177

NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used.

** With the HPP, both the Counter discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data
reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and
“CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-41
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. When the current value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter status bit CT2
will turn on and energize Y7. When the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will
turn off and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter CT2 will be held in
V-memory location V1002.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting diagram
X1
CNT CT2
X1
K3
C10
C10

CT2 or
CT2 Y7 Y7
OUT Current Value 1 2 3 4 0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

$ B ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C ENT

STR 1 STR 2 MLR 2
$ SHFT C B A ENT GX B A ENT
STR 2 1 0 OUT 1 0
GY C D ENT
CNT 2 3

Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different counts. When
the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be
0, and the comparative contacts will turn off.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting diagram
X1
CNT CT2
X1
K3
C10
C10

CTA2 K1 Y3 Y3

OUT
Y4

CTA2 K2 Y4
Y5
OUT
Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value
CTA2 K3 Y5

OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

$ B ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C

STR 1 STR 2 MLR 2
$ SHFT C B A ENT C ENT
STR 2 1 0 2
GY C D ENT GX E ENT
CNT 2 3 OUT 4
$ SHFT C SHFT T C $ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 2 MLR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
B ENT D ENT
1 3
GX D ENT GX F ENT
OUT 3 OUT 5

5-42 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Stage Counter (SGCNT)

DS5 Used
The Stage Counter is a single input counter that
increments when the input logic transitions from off Counter#
HPP Used
to on. This counter differs from other counters since
it will hold its current value until reset using the RST SGCNT CT aaa
instruction. The Stage Counter is designed for use in B bbb
RLLPLUS programs but can be used in relay ladder logic
programs. When the current value equals the preset Preset
value, the counter status bit turns on and the counter
continues to count up to a maximum count of 9999. The counter discrete status bit and the
current value are not specified in the
The maximum value will be held until the counter is counter instruction.
reset.
Instruction Specifications
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory location.
Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT
memory locations*. The V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For example, the
counter current value for CT3 resides in V-memory location V1003.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory
location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example the
discrete status bit for counter 2 would be CT2.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
Counters ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–177 ––
1200–7377
V-memory (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V ––
7400–7577*
1200–7377
Pointers (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P ––
7400–7577
Constants (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–9999
Counter discrete status bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ CT/V 0–177 or V41140–41147
Counter current values ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V /CT** 1000–1177

NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used.

** With the HPP, both the Counter discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data
reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and
“CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-43
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, stage counter CT7 will
increment by one. When the current value reaches 3, the counter status bit CT7 will turn on
and energize Y7. The counter status bit CT7 will remain on until the counter is reset using the
RST instruction. When the counter is reset, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter
current value will be 0. The current value for counter CT7 will be held in V-memory location
V1007.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting diagram
X1
SGCNT CT7
X1
K3

CT7 Y7 Y7
OUT Current 1 2 3 4 0
Value
C5 CT7 RST
RST CT7

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

$ B ENT GX B A ENT
STR 1 OUT 1 0

SHFT S SHFT G SHFT GY $ SHFT C F ENT

RST 6 CNT STR 2 5
H D ENT S SHFT C SHFT T H ENT
7 3 RST 2 MLR 7
$ SHFT C SHFT T H ENT
STR 2 MLR 7

Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different counts. Although
this is not shown in the example, when the counter is reset using the Reset instruction, the
counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter
CT2 will be held in V-memory location V1002.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting diagram
X1
SGCNT CT2
K10
X1

CT2 K1 Y3
Y3
OUT

Y4
CT2 K2 Y4

OUT
Y5

Y5 Current 1 2 3 4 0
CT2 K3
Value
OUT
RST
CT2

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

$ B ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C

STR 1 STR 2 MLR 2

SHFT S G SHFT GY C ENT

RST 6 CNT 2
C B A ENT GX E ENT
2 1 0 OUT 4
$ SHFT C SHFT T C $ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 2 MLR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
B ENT D ENT
1 3
GX D ENT GX F ENT
OUT 3 OUT 5

5-44 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Up Down Counter (UDC)

DS5 Used
This Up/Down Counter counts up on each off to on
HPP Used
transition of the Up input and counts down on each CT aaa
Up UDC
off to on transition of the Down input. The counter is B bbb
reset to 0 when the Reset input is on. The count range
Down
is 0–99999999. The count input not being used must Counter #

be off in order for the active count input to function.

Reset
Instruction Specification Preset

Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter

number. Caution: The UDC uses two
V-memory locations for the 8 digit
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or two current value. This means that the
consecutive V-memory locations as a BCD value. UDC uses two consecutive
Current Values: Current count is a double word counter locations. If UDC CT1 is
used in the program, the next
value accessed by referencing the associated V or CT available counter is CT3.
memory locations*. The V-memory location is the
counter location + 1000. For example, the counter The counter discrete status bit and
current value for CT5 resides in V-memory location the current value are not specified in
V1005 and V1006 as a BCD value. the counter instruction
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed
by referencing the associated CT memory location.
Operating as a “counter done bit” it will be on if the
value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For
example the discrete status bit for counter 2 would be
CT2.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
Counters ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠CT 0–176 ––
1200–7377
V-memory (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V ––
7400–7577*
1200–7377
Pointers (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P ––
7400–7577
Constants (preset only) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 0–99999999
Counter discrete status bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ CT/V 0–176 or V41140–41147
Counter current values ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V /CT** 0–176

NOTE: * May be non-volatile if MOV instruction is used.

** With the HPP, both the Counter discrete status bits and current value are accessed with the same data
reference. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2, and
“CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-45
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Up / Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits

In the following example if X2 and X3 are off ,when X1 toggles from off to on the counter will
increment by one. If X1 and X3 are off the counter will decrement by one when X2 toggles
from off to on. When the count value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter status bit will
turn on. When the reset X3 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value
will be 0.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting Diagram
X1
UDC CT2
K3 X1
X2

X2

X3
X3

CT2
CT2 Y7
Current 1 2 1 2 3 0
OUT Value

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

$ B ENT D ENT
STR 1 3
$ C ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C ENT
STR 2 STR 2 MLR 2
$ D ENT GX B A ENT
STR 3 OUT 1 0

SHFT U D C C
ISG 3 2 2

Up / Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts

In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 and Y4 at different counts. When the
reset (X3) turns on, the counter status bit will turn off, the current value will be 0, and the
comparative contacts will turn off.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Counting Diagram
X1
UDC CT2
V2000 X1
X2

X2

X3
X3

CTA2 K1 Y3 Y3
OUT

Y4

CTA2 K2 Y4 1 2 3 4 0
Current
Value
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)

$ B ENT B ENT
STR 1 1
$ C ENT GX D ENT
STR 2 OUT 3
$ D ENT $ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 3 STR 2 MLR 2

SHFT U D C C C ENT
ISG 3 2 2 2

SHFT V C A A A ENT GX E ENT

AND 2 0 0 0 OUT 4
$ SHFT C SHFT T C
STR 2 MLR 2

5-46 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Shift Register (SR)

DS5 Used The Shift Register instruction shifts data through a SR
DATA
HPP Used predefined number of control relays. The control ranges
in the shift register block must start at the beginning of an From A aaa
8 bit boundary use 8-bit blocks. CLOCK
The Shift Register has three contacts.
To B bbb
• Data — determines the value (1 or RESET
0) that will enter the register
• Clock — shifts the bits one position
on each low to high transition
• Reset —resets the Shift Register to all zeros.
With each off to on transition of the clock input, the bits which make up the shift register
block are shifted by one bit position and the status of the data input is placed into the starting
bit position in the shift register. The direction of the shift depends on the entry in the From
and To fields. From C0 to C17 would define a block of sixteen bits to be shifted from left to
right. From C17 to C0 would define a block of sixteen bits, to be shifted from right to left. The
maximum size of the shift register block depends on the number of available control relays. The
minimum block size is 8 control relays.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A/B aaa bbb
Control Relay ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777 0–777

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 $ B ENT
Data Input SR STR 1
$ C ENT
STR 2
From C0
X2 $ D
Clock Input ENT
STR 3

SHFT S SHFT R SHFT A

To C17 RST ORN 0
X3
Reset Input
B H ENT
1 7

Inputs on Successive Scans Shift Register Bits

C0 C17
1 0-1-0 0
0 0-1-0 0
0 0-1-0 0
1 0-1-0 0
0 0-1-0 0
0 0 1
Indicates Indicates
ON OFF

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-47
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions

Using the Accumulator
The accumulator in the DL05 internal CPUs is a 32 bit register which is used as a temporary
storage location for data that is being copied or manipulated in some manor. For example, you
have to use the accumulator to perform math operations such as add, subtract, multiply, etc.
Since there are 32 bits, you can use up to an 8-digit BCD number. The accumulator is reset to
0 at the end of every CPU scan.

Copying Data to the Accumulator

The Load and Out instructions and their variations are used to copy data from a V-memory
location to the accumulator, or, to copy data from the accumulator to V-memory. The
following example copies data from V-memory location V2000 to V-memory location V2010.

V2000
X1 LD 8 9 3 5
V2000
Unused accumulator bits
Copy data from V2000 to the
are set to zero
lower 16 bits of the accumu-
lator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 88 99 33 55

OUT
V2010 8 9 3 5

Copy data from the lower 16 bits V2010

of the accumulator to V2010

Since the accumulator is 32 bits and V-memory locations are 16 bits the Load Double and
Out Double (or variations thereof) use two consecutive V-memory locations or 8 digit
BCD constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a V-memory address or from a
V-memory address to the accumulator. For example if you wanted to copy data from V2000
and V2001 to V2010 and V2011 the most efficient way to perform this function would be as
follows:
X1 V2001 V2000
LDD
V2000 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6

Copy data from V2000 and

V2001 to the accumulator

Acc. 6 7 3 9 55 00 22 66

OUTD
V2010 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
Copy data from the accumulator to
V2010 and V2011 V2011 V2010

5-48 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Changing the Accumulator Data

Instructions that manipulate data also use the accumulator. The result of the manipulated
data resides in the accumulator. The data that was being manipulated is cleared from the
accumulator. The following example loads the constant value 4935 into the accumulator, shifts
the data right 4 bits, and outputs the result to V2010.

X1 LD Constant 4 9 3 5
K4935

Load the value 4935 into the

accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

The upper 16 bits of the accumulator

will be set to 0

Shifted out of
accumulator

SHFR 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
K4 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

Shift the data in the accumulator

4 bits (K4) to the right

OUT
V2010
0 4 9 3
Output the lower 16 bits of the ac-
cumulator to V2010 V2010

Some of the data manipulation instructions use 32 bits. They use two consecutive V-memory
locations or an 8 digit BCD constant to manipulate data in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is added
with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
V2001 V2000
X1 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
LDD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 (Accumulator)
ADDD
+ 2 0 0 0 4 0 4 6 (V2006&V2007)
V2006
Acc. 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2
Add the value in the
accumulator with the value
in V2006 and V2007

OUTD
V2010 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2

Copy the value in the V2011 V2010

accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-49
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Using the Accumulator Stack

The accumulator stack is used for instructions that require more than one parameter to
execute a function or for user defined functionality. The accumulator stack is used when more
than one Load instruction is executed without the use of an Out instruction. The first load
instruction in the scan places a value into the accumulator. Every Load instruction thereafter
without the use of an Out instruction places a value into the accumulator and the value that
was in the accumulator is placed onto the accumulator stack. The Out instruction nullifies
the previous load instruction and does not place the value that was in the accumulator onto
the accumulator stack when the next load instruction is executed. Every time a value is placed
onto the accumulator stack the other values in the stack are pushed down one location. The
accumulator is eight levels deep (eight 32 bit registers). If there is a value in the eighth location
when a new value is placed onto the stack, the value in the eighth location is pushed off the
stack and cannot be recovered.

X1 LD Constant 3 2 4 5
K3245
Current Acc. value
Accumulator Stack
Load the value 3245 into the Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5
accumulator Level 1 X X X X X X X X
Previous Acc. value X X X X X X X
Level 2 X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
Acc. X X X X X
X X X X
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Constant 5 1 5 1 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
LD
K5151 Level 8 X X X X X X X X
Current Acc. value

Load the value 5151 into the Acc. 0 0 0 0 55 1 5 1

accumulator, pushing the value Bucket
Previous Acc. value Accumulator Stack
3245 onto the stack
Acc. 0 0 0 0 33 22 44 55 Level 1 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5
Level 2 X X X X X X X X
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
Level 6 X X X X X X X X

6 3 6 3 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
LD Constant
Level 8 X X X X X X X X
K6363 Current Acc. value

Acc. 0 0 0 0 66 33 66 33
Load the value 6363 into the Bucket
accumulator, pushing the value Previous Acc. value Accumulator Stack
5151 to the 1st stack location
and the value 3245 to the Acc. 0 0 0 0 55 1 5 1 Level 1 0 0 0 0 5 1 5 1
2nd stack location Level 2 0 0 0 0 3 2 4 5
0 0 0 0
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Level 7 X X X X X X X X
Level 8 X X X X X X X X

Bucket

The POP instruction rotates values upward through the stack into the accumulator. When a
POP is executed the value which was in the accumulator is cleared and the value that was on
top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are shifted up one position in
the stack.

5-50 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

X1 POP Previous Acc. value

Acc. X X X X XX XX XX X

Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack

POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values Level 1 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2
Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 4 5
up one location
Level 2 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
OUT
V2000 4 5 4 5 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
V2000
Level 7 X X X X X X X X
Copy data from the accumulator to Level 8 X X X X X X X X
V2000

POP Previous Acc. value

Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 44 55

Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack

POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values Acc. 0 0 0 0 33 77 99 22 Level 1 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0
up one location
Level 2 X X X X X X X X
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
OUT
V2001 3 7 9 2 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
V2001
Level 7 X X X X X X X X
Copy data from the accumulator to Level 8 X X X X X X X X
V2001.

Previous Acc. value

POP
Acc. 0 0 0 0 33 47 69 02

Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack

POP the 1st value on the stack into the
Acc. X X X X 77 99 33 00 Level 1 X X X X X X X X
accumulator and move stack values
up one location Level 2 X X X X X X X X
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
OUT V2002 7 9 3 0 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
V2002
Level 7 X X X X X X X X
Copy data from the accumulator to Level 8 X X X X X X X X
V2002

Using Pointers
Many of the DL05 series instructions will allow V-memory pointers as a operand (commonly
known as indirect addressing). Pointers allow instructions to obtain data from V-memory
locations referenced by the pointer value.
NOTE: DL05 V-memory addressing is in octal. However, the pointers reference a V-memory location
with values viewed as HEX. Use the Load Address (LDA) instruction to move an address into the pointer
location. This instruction performs the Octal to Hexadecimal conversion automatically.

In the following simple example we are using a pointer operand in a Load instruction.
V-memory location 2000 is being used as the pointer location. V2000 contains the value 440
which the CPU views as the Hex equivalent of the Octal address V-memory location V2100.
The CPU will copy the data from V2100 which in this example contains the value 2635 into
the lower word of the accumulator.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-51
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

X1 V2076 X X X X
LD
V2077 X X X X
P2000
V2100 2 6 3 5
V2000 (P2000) contains the value 440 V2101 X X X X
HEX. 440 HEX. = 2100 Octal which
contains the value 2635. V2102 X X X X
V2000 V2103 X X X X
Accumulator
0 4 4 0 V2104 X X X X
2 6 3 5
V2105 X X X X
OUT
V2200

Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2200. V2200 2 6 3 5
V2201 X X X X

The following example is identical to the one above with one exception. The LDA (Load
Address) instruction automatically converts the Octal address to Hex.

X1 LDA Load the lower 16 bits of the

accumulator with Hexadecimal
O 2100 equivalent to Octal 2100 (440) 2 1 0 0

2100 Octal is converted to Hexadecimal

Unused accumulator bits 440 and loaded into the accumulator
are set to zero

Acc. 0 0 0 0 00 44 44 00

OUT Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2000 0 4 4 0
V 2000
V2000

V2076 X X X X
V2077 X X X X

V2000 (P2000) contains the value 440 V2100 2 6 3 5

LD
Hex. 440 Hex. = 2100 Octal which V2101 X X X X
P 2000 contains the value 2635
V2102 X X X X
V2100 V2103 X X X X
Accumulator
0 4 4 0 V2104 X X X X
V2105 X X X X 0 0 0 0 22 66 33 55

OUT Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of

the accumulator to V2200 V2200 2 6 3 5
V 2200
V2201 X X X X

5-52 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load (LD)
DS5 Used The Load instruction is a 16 bit instruction that loads the LD
HPP Used value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 4 A aaa
digit constant, into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator.
The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are set to 0.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the pointer is outside of the available range.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator is zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
and output to V2010.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
V2000
X1 LD 8 9 3 5
V2000

Load the value in V2000 into The unused accumulator

the lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 88 99 33 55

OUT
V2010

Copy the value in the lower 8 9 3 5

16 bits of the accumulator to V2010
V2010

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B X
STR 1 SET

SHFT L D
ANDST 3
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-53
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Double (LDD)

LDD
DS5 Used The Load Double instruction is a 32 bit instruction that loads
A aaa
HPP Used the value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory
locations or an 8 digit constant value, into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the pointer is outside of the available range.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32 bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator and output to V2010 and V2011.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 LDD V2001 V2000

V2000 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the 32 bit
accumulator
Acc. 6 7 3 9 65 00 22 66

6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
OUTD
V2010 V2011 V2010

Copy the value in the 32 bit

accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D
ANDST 3 3
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
GX SHFT D
OUT 3
C A B A ENT
2 0 1 0

5-54 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Formatted (LDF)

DS5 Used The Load Formatted instruction loads 1–32
LDF A aaa
HPP Used consecutive bits from discrete memory locations into
K bbb
the accumulator. The instruction requires a starting
location (Aaaa) and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be
loaded. Unused accumulator bit locations are set to zero.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa bbb
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X 0–377 ––
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Y 0–377 ––
Control Relays⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ C 0–777 ––
Stage Bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ S 0–377 ––
Timer Bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177 ––
Counter Bits ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ CT 0–177 ––
Special Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ SP 0–777 ––
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K –– 1–32

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 (7 bits) will be
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 bits of the
accumulator are output to Y0–Y6 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
C0 Location Constant
LDF C10 C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10
K7 C10 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

Load the status of 7

consecutive bits (C10–C16) The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

OUTF Y0
K7
Location Constant Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Copy the value from the
specified number of bits in Y0 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
the accumulator to Y0 – Y6
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ SHFT C A ENT
STR 2 0

SHFT L D F
ANDST 3 5

SHFT C B A H ENT
2 1 0 7
GX SHFT F
OUT 5
A H ENT
0 7

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-55
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Load Address (LDA)

DS5 Used
The Load Address instruction is a 16 bit instruction. It converts
LDA
HPP Used
any octal value or address to the HEX equivalent value and
O aaa
loads the HEX value into the accumulator. This instruction is
useful when an address parameter is required since all addresses
for the DL05 system are in octal.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
Octal Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠O See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP76 On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.

NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.

In the following example when X1 is on, the octal number 40400 will be converted to a HEX
4100 and loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The value in the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2000 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 LDA Octal Hexadecimal
O 40400 4 0 4 0 0 4 1 0 0

Load The HEX equivalent to

the octal number into the The unused accumulator
lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 4 1 0 0

4 1 0 0
OUT
V2000 V2000

Copy the value in lower 16

bits of the accumulator to
V2000

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D A
ANDST 3 0
E A E A A ENT
4 0 4 0 0
GX SHFT V C A A A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 0

5-56 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Out (OUT)
DS5 Used The Out instruction is a 16 bit instruction that copies the OUT
HPP Used value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to a specified A aaa
V-memory location (Aaaa).
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the pointer is outside of the available range.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator are copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.V2000
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X1 LD V2000 $ B ENT
8 9 3 5 STR 1
V2000
SHFT L D
Load the value in V2000 into ANDST 3
the lower 16 bits of the The unused accumulator
accumulator bits are set to zero C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 88 99 33 55
OUT GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0
V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to 8 9 3 5
V2010 V2010

Out Double (OUTD)

DS5 Used The Out Double instruction is a 32 bit instruction that OUTD
HPP Used copies the value in the accumulator to two consecutive V A aaa
memory locations at a specified starting location (Aaaa).
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V All (See page 4–28)
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P All V-memory (See page 4–28)

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the pointer is outside of the available range.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32 bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is
output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2001 V2000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
X1 $ B ENT
LDD STR 1
V2000
SHFT L D D
Load the value in V2000 and ANDST 3 3
V2001 into the accumulator Acc. 6 7 3 9 55 00 22 66
C A A A ENT
2 0 0 0
OUTD
GX SHFT D
V2010 OUT 3
Copy the value in the 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 C A B A ENT
accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2010 2 0 1 0
V2011

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-57
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Out Formatted (OUTF)

The Out Formatted instruction outputs 1–32 bits from
OUTF A aaa
DS5 Used the accumulator to the specified discrete memory locations.
K bbb
HPP Used The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) for the
destination and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be output.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa bbb
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X 0–377 ––
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠Y 0–377 ––
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠C 0–777 ––
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K –– 1–32

In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 (7 bits) will be
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 bits of the
accumulator are output to Y0–Y6 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT 5
C0 Location Constant
LDF C10 C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10
K7 C10 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

Load the status of 7

consecutive bits (C10–C16) The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
OUTF Y20
Accumulator
K7

Copy the value of the

specified number of bits
from the accumulator to
Y20–Y26 Location Constant Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
Y0 K7 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ SHFT C A ENT
STR 2 0

SHFT L D F
ANDST 3 5

SHFT C B A H ENT
2 1 0 7
GX SHFT F
OUT 5
A H ENT
0 7

POP
DS5 Used The POP instruction moves the value from the first level of the POP
HPP Used accumulator stack (32 bits) to the accumulator and shifts each
value in the stack up one level.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

5-58 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Pop Instruction (cont’d)

In the example below, when C0 is on, the value 4545 that was on top of the stack is moved
into the accumulator using the Pop instruction The value is output to V2000 using the Out
instruction. The next Pop moves the value 3792 into the accumulator and outputs the value
to V2001. The last Pop moves the value 7930 into the accumulator and outputs the value
to V2002. Please note if the value in the stack were greater than 16 bits (4 digits) the Out
Double instruction would be used and two V-memory locations for each Out Double must
be allocated.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
Previous Acc. value
C0 POP
Acc. X X X X XX XX XX XX

Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the
Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 44 55 Level 1 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2
accumulator and move stack values
up one location Level 2 0
0 0
0 0 0 7 9 3 0
Level 3 X X X X X X X X

OUT Level 4 X X X X X X X X
V2000 Level 5 X X X X X X X X
V2000 4 5 4 5 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2000 Level 7 X X X X X X X X
Level 8 X X X X X X X X

POP
Previous Acc. value

Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 44 55
Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack
up one location
Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2 Level 1 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0
Level 2 X X X X X X X X
OUT Level 3 X X X X X X X X
V2001
Level 4 X X X X X X X X

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of Level 5 X X X X X X X X

the accumulator to V2001 V2001 3 7 9 2 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Level 7 X X X X X X X X
POP Level 8 X X X X X X X X

Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the Previous Acc. value
accumulator and move stack values
up one location Acc. 0 0 0 0 3 7 9 2

Current Acc. value Accumulator Stack

OUT Acc. 0 0 0 0 7 9 3 0 Level 1 X X X X X X X X

V2002 Level 2 X X X X X X X X
Level 3 X X X X X X X X
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2002 Level 4 X X X X X X X X
Level 5 X X X X X X X X
V2002 7 9 3 0 Level 6 X X X X X X X X
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
Level 7 X X X X X X X X
$ SHFT C A ENT Level 8 X X X X X X X X
STR 2 0

SHFT P SHFT O P ENT

CV INST# CV
GX SHFT V C A A A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 0

SHFT P SHFT O P ENT

CV INST# CV
GX SHFT V C A A B ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 1

SHFT P SHFT O P ENT

CV INST# CV
GX SHFT V C A A C ENT
OUT AND 2 0 0 2

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-59
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Logical Instructions (Accumulator)

And (AND)
The And instruction is a 16 bit instruction that logically ands
DS5 Used the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a specified AND
HPP Used V-memory location (Aaaa). The result resides in the accumulator. A aaa

The discrete status flag indicates if the result of the And is zero.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On if the result in the accumulator is zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded with the value in V2006
using the And instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to
V2010 using the Out instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000

Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

AND
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

AND the value in the 6A38

accumulator with AND (V2006) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the value in V2006
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

OUT
V2010
2 8 3 8
Copy the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator to V2010 V2010

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
V SHFT V C A A G ENT
AND AND 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

5-60 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

And Double (ANDD)

The And Double is a 32 bit instruction that logically ands
DS5 Used
the value in the accumulator with two consecutive V-memory
HPP Used ANDD
locations or an 8 digit (max.) constant value (Aaaa). The result
K aaa
resides in the accumulator. Discrete status flags indicate if the
result of the And Double is zero or a negative number (the
most significant bit is on).

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On if the result in the accumulator is zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded
with 36476A38 using the And double instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to
V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000 V2000
X1 LDD 5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

ANDD
K36476A38 Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

AND the value in the

accumulator with AND 36476A38 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the constant value
36476A38 Acc. 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0
1 0
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

OUTD
V2010 1 4 4 6 2 8 3 8

Copy the value in the V2011 V2010

accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
V SHFT D SHFT K D G E H G SHFT A SHFT D I ENT
AND 3 JMP 3 6 4 7 6 0 3 8
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-61
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or (OR)
DS5 Used
The Or instruction is a 16 bit instruction that logically ors the
OR
HPP Used
value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a specified
A aaa
V-memory location (Aaaa). The result resides in the accumulator.
The discrete status flag indicates if the result of the OR is zero.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On if the result in the accumulator is zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is OR’ed with V2006 using the Or
instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are output to V2010 using the
Out instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000

Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

OR
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

Or the value in the 6A38

accumulator with OR (V2006) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the value in V2006
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

OUT
V2010
6 A 7 A
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to V2010
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0
Q SHFT V C A A G ENT
OR AND 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

5-62 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Or Double (ORD)
DS5 Used The Or Double is a 32 bit instruction that ors the value in
the accumulator with the value (Aaaa), which is either two ORD
HPP Used
consecutive V-memory locations or an 8 digit (max.) constant K aaa
value. The result resides in the accumulator. Discrete status
flags indicate if the result of the Or Double is zero or a negative
number (the most significant bit is on).
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On if the result in the accumulator is zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is OR’ed
with 36476A38 using the Or Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to
V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 V2001 V2000
LDD
5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A
V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into accumulator

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

ORD
K36476A38 Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

OR the value in the

accumulator with OR 36476A38 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the constant value
36476A38 Acc. 0 1
0 1
0 1
0 0 1 1
0 0 0 1
0 1
0 1
0 1
0 0
1 0
1 1
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

OUTD
V2010
7 6 7 F 6 A 7 A
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2010
V2011

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
Q SHFT D SHFT K D G E H G SHFT A SHFT D I ENT
OR 3 JMP 3 6 4 7 6 0 3 8
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-63
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Exclusive Or (XOR)
DS5 Used The Exclusive Or instruction is a 16 bit instruction that
performs an exclusive or of the value in the lower 16 bits of XOR
HPP Used
the accumulator and a specified V-memory location (Aaaa). A aaa
The result resides in the in the accumulator. The discrete
status flag indicates if the result of the XOR is zero.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On if the result in the accumulator is zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusive OR’ed with V2006 using
the Exclusive Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are output to
V2010 using the Out instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 V2000
LD
2 8 7 A
V2000

Load the value in V2000 into The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
the lower 16 bits of the will be set to 0
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

XOR
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

XOR the value in the 6A38

accumulator with XOR (V2006) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
the value in V2006
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

OUT
V2010
4 2 4 2
Copy the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator to V2010 V2010

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ SHFT X B ENT
STR SET 1

SHFT L D SHFT V C A A A ENT

ANDST 3 AND 2 0 0 0

SHFT X SHFT Q SHFT V C A A G ENT

SET OR AND 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

5-64 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Exclusive Or Double (XORD)

DS5 Used
The Exclusive OR Double is a 32 bit instruction that
HPP Used
performs an exclusive or of the value in the accumulator XORD
and the value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive K aaa
V-memory locations or an 8 digit (max.) constant. The
result resides in the accumulator. Discrete status flags
indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or Double is zero or
a negative number (the most significant bit is on).
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On if the result in the accumulator is zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is
exclusively OR’ed with 36476A38 using the Exclusive Or Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2001 V2000
X1 LDD 5 4 7 E 2 8 7 A

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
XORD Acc. 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
K36476A38

XORD the value in the 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

Acc.
accumulator with
the constant value
36476A38 XORD 36476A38 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0

OUTD Acc. 0 1
0 1
0 0 0 0
1 1
0 0 0 0 1
0 1
0 1
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010
and V2011 6 2 3 9 4 2 4 2

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes V2011 V2010

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT X Q SHFT D SHFT K

SET OR 3 JMP
D G E H G SHFT A SHFT D I ENT
3 6 4 7 6 0 3 8
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-65
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Compare (CMP)
DS5 Used The compare instruction is a 16 bit instruction that compares the
CMP
HPP Used value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with the value in a
A aaa
specified V-memory location (Aaaa). The corresponding status flag
will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.
SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.
SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example when X1 is on, the constant 4526 will be loaded into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared
with the value in V2000 using the Compare instruction. The corresponding discrete status
flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in
the accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on
energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 LD CONSTANT
K4526 4 5 ?
2 ?
6

Load the constant value The unused accumulator

4526 into the lower 16 bits of bits are set to zero
the accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 44 55 2?
2 66
?

Compared
with
CMP
V2000
8 9 4 5
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value V2000
in V2000

SP60 C30
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D SHFT K E F C G ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 4 5 2 6

SHFT C SHFT M P C A A A ENT

2 ORST CV 2 0 0 0
$ SHFT SP G A ENT
STR STRN 6 0
GX SHFT C D A ENT
OUT 2 3 0

5-66 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Compare Double (CMPD)

The Compare Double instruction is a 32–bit instruction that
DS5 Used compares the value in the accumulator with the value (Aaaa), CMPD
HPP Used which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8– A aaa
digit (max.) constant. The corresponding status flag will be
turned on indicating the result of the comparison.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFFFFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP60 On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.
SP61 On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.
SP62 On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared
with the value in V2010 and V2011 using the CMPD instruction. The corresponding discrete
status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the
value in the accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will
turn on energizing C30.
Direct SOFT32
DirectSOFT
X1 V2001 V2000
LDD
4 5 2 6 7 2 9 9
V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

Acc. 4 5 ?
2 6 77 72 9 9

Compared
CMPD with
V2010
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value V2011 V2010
in V2010 and V2011

SP60 C30
OUT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT C SHFT M P D C A B A ENT

2 ORST CV 3 2 0 1 0
$ SHFT SP G A ENT
STR STRN 6 0
GX SHFT C D A ENT
OUT 2 3 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-67
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Math Instructions
Add (ADD)
Add is a 16 bit instruction that adds a BCD value in the ADD
DS5 Used accumulator with a BCD value in a V-memory location (Aaaa). A aaa
HPP Used The result resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are added to the
value in V2006 using the Add instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010
using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
X1 4 9 3 5
LD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the The unused accumulator
accumulator bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 4 9 3 5 (Accumulator)
ADD
+ 2 5 0 0 (V2006)
V2006
Acc. 7 4 3 5
Add the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
with the value in V2006

OUT
V2010 7 4 3 5

Copy the value in the lower V2010

16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT A D D C A A G ENT
0 3 3 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

5-68 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Double (ADDD)

DS5 Used
Add Double is a 32 bit instruction that adds the BCD
HPP Used
value in the accumulator with a BCD value (Aaaa), ADDD
which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or A aaa
an 8–digit (max.) BCD constant. The result resides in
the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–99999999

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is added
with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
Direct SOFT V2001 V2000
X1 6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6
LDD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
6 7 3 9 5 0 2 6 (Accumulator)
ADDD (V2006 and V2007)
+ 2 0 0 0 4 0 4 6
V2006
Acc. 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2
Add the value in the
accumulator with the value
in V2006 and V2007

OUTD
V2010 8 7 3 9 9 0 7 2

Copy the value in the V2011 V2010

accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT A D D D C A A G ENT
0 3 3 3 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT D SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT 3 AND 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-69
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract (SUB)
SUB
DS5 Used
Subtract is a 16 bit instruction that subtracts the BCD value (Aaaa) in
A aaa
HPP Used
a V-memory location from the BCD value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP64 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a borrow
SP65 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a borrow
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator
using the Subtract instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out
instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
2 4 7 5
X1 LD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 into The unused accumulator

the lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero
accumulator 0 0 0 0 2 4 7 5 (Accumulator)

SUB _
1 5 9 2 (V2006)
V2006
Acc. 0 8 8 3
Subtract the value in V2006
from the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator

OUT 0 8 8 3
V2010
V2010
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT S U B SHFT V C A A G ENT

RST ISG 1 AND 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

5-70 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Double (SUBD)

SUBD
Subtract Double is a 32 bit instruction that subtracts the BCD value
DS5 Used A aaa
(Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an
HPP Used
8-digit (max.) constant, from the BCD value in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–99999999

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP64 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a borrow
SP65 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a borrow
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V2006 and V2007
is subtracted from the value in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
Direct SOFT V2001 V2000
0 1 0 6 3 2 7 4
X1 LDD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
0 1 0 6 3 2 7 4 (Accumulator)
_ 6 7 2 3 7 5 (V2006 and V2007)
SUBD
V2006 ACC. 0 0 3 9 0 8 9 9

The in V2006 and V2007 is

subtracted from the value in
the accumulator

OUTD 0 0 3 9 0 8 9 9
V2010
V2011 V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT S SHFT U B D C A A G ENT

RST ISG 1 3 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-71
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply (MUL)
DS5 Used
Multiply is a 16 bit instruction that multiplies the BCD MUL
HPP Used
value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 4– A aaa
digit (max.) constant, by the BCD value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator The result can be up to 8 digits and
resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–9999

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator.
The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000

X1 1 0 0 0
LD
V2000
The unused accumulator
Load the value in V2000 into bits are set to zero
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (Accumulator)
(V2006)
X 2 5
MUL
V2006 Acc. 0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0

The value in V2006 is

multiplied by the value in the
accumulator

0 0 0 2 5 0 0 0
OUTD
V2011 V2010
V2010

Copy the value in the

accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT M U L C A A G ENT
ORST ISG ANDST 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

5-72 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply Double (MULD)

DS5 Used
Multiply Double is a 32 bit instruction that multiplies the
HPP Used
8-digit BCD value in the accumulator by the 8-digit BCD
MULD
value in the two consecutive V-memory locations specified
A aaa
in the instruction. The lower 8 digits of the results reside
in the accumulator. Upper digits of the result reside in the
accumulator stack.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant Kbc614e hex will be loaded into the
accumulator. When converted to BCD the number is ”12345678”. That number is stored in
V1400 and V1401. After loading the constant K2 into the accumulator, we multiply it times
12345678, which is 24691356.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (Accumulator)
X1 LDD Load the hex equivalent
of 12345678 decimal into
Kbc614e the accumulator.

Convert the value to V1401 V1400

BCD
BCD format. It will 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
occupy eight BCD digits
(32 bits).
OUTD Output the number to X 2 (Accumulator)
V1400 and V1401 using
V1400 the OUTD instruction. Acc. 2 4 6 9 1 3 5 6

LD Load the constant K2

into the accumulator.
K2

2 4 6 9 1 3 5 6
MULD Multiply the accumulator
contents (2) by the
V1400 V1403 V1402
8-digit number in V1400
and V1401.

OUTD Move the result in the

accumulator to V1402
V1402 and V1403 using the
OUTD instruction.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D PREV SHFT B C SHFT G B E SHFT E ENT

ANDST 3 3 1 2 6 1 4 4

SHFT B C D ENT
1 2 3
GX SHFT D B E A A ENT
OUT 3 1 4 0 0

SHFT L D PREV C ENT

ANDST 3 2

SHFT M U L D B E A A ENT
ORST ISG ANDST 3 1 4 0 0
GX SHFT D B E A C ENT
OUT 3 1 4 0 2

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-73
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide (DIV)
DS5 Used Divide is a 16 bit instruction that divides the BCD value
HPP Used in the accumulator by a BCD value (Aaaa), which is either DIV
a V-memory location or a 4-digit (max.) constant. The A aaa
first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and
the remainder resides in the first stack location.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–9999

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator will be divided by the value in V2006
using the Divide instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out
instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
5 0 0 0
X1 LD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 into The unused accumulator

the lower 16 bits of the bits are set to zero
accumulator
0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 (Accumulater)
DIV ÷ V2006
4 9
V2006
Acc. 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2
The value in the
accumulator is divided by First stak location contains
the value in V2006 the remainder

OUT 1 0 2
V2010 V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT D I V C A A G ENT
3 8 AND 2 0 0 6
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

5-74 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Divide Double (DIVD)

DS5 Used Divide Double is a 32 bit instruction that divides the BCD
HPP Used value in the accumulator by a BCD value (Aaaa), which must DIVD
be obtained from two consecutive V-memory locations. (You A aaa
cannot use a constant as the parameter in the box.) The
first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and the
remainder resides in the first stack location.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is divided
by the value in V1420 and V1421 using the Divide Double instruction. The first part of the
quotient resides in the accumulator an the remainder resides in the first stack location. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT 5 V1401 V1400
X1 LDD 0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0
V1400

Load the value in V1400 and The unused accumulator

V1401 into the accumulator bits are set to zero

0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 (Accumulator)

DIVD  0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 (V1421 and V1420)

V1420
Acc. 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The value in the accumulator First stack location contains
is divided by the value in the remainder
V1420 and V1421

OUTD
V1500 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0

Copy the value in the V1501 V1500

accumulator to V1500
and V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT SHFT L D D
STR 1 ANDST 3 3
B E A A ENT SHFT D I V
1 4 0 0 3 8 AND
B E C A ENT GX SHFT D
1 4 2 0 OUT 3
B F A A ENT
1 5 0 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-75
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Increment (INC)
INC
DS5 Used The Increment instruction increments a BCD value in a
A aaa
HPP Used specified V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction
is executed.
Decrement (DEC)
DS5 Used The Decrement instruction decrements a BCD value in a DEC
HPP Used specified V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction A aaa
is executed.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following increment example, when C5 is on the value in V1400 increases by one.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V1400

C5 8 9 3 5
INC
V1400

Increment the value in

V1400 by “1”. V1400
8 9 3 6
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT F ENT

STR 5

SHFT I N C B E A A ENT
8 TMR 2 1 4 0 0

In the following decrement example, when C5 is on the value in V1400 is decreased by one.
Direct SOFT32 V1400
DirectSOFT
C5 8 9 3 5
DEC
V1400

Decrement the value in

V1400 by “1”.
V1400
8 9 3 4
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT F ENT

STR 5

SHFT D E C B E A A ENT
3 4 2 1 4 0 0

5-76 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Increment Binary (INCB)

The Increment Binary instruction increments a binary INCB
DS5 Used value in a specified V-memory location by “1” each time A aaa
HPP Used the instruction is executed.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

In the following example when C5 is on, the binary value in V2000 is increased by 1.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
C5 4 A 3 C
INCB $ SHFT C F ENT
STR 2 5
V2000
SHFT I N C B C A A A ENT
Increment the binary value 8 TMR 2 1 2 0 0 0
in the accumulator by“1” V2000
4 A 3 D

DECB
DS5 Used Decrement Binary (DECB)
HPP Used A aaa
The Decrement Binary instruction decrements a binary
value in a specified V-memory location by “1” each time
the instruction is executed.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example when C5 is on, the value in V2000 is decreased by 1.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
4 A 3 C
C5 DECB $ C F
SHFT ENT
STR 2 5
V2000
SHFT D E C B C A A A ENT
Decrement the binary value 3 4 2 1 2 0 0 0
in the accumulator by“1” V2000
4 A 3 B

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-77
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Add Binary (ADDB)

DS5 Used Add Binary is a 16 bit instruction that adds the binary value
HPP Used in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a binary value ADDB
(Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 16-bit A aaa
constant. The result can be up to 32 bits and resides in the
accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP66 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP67 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP73 On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator will be added to the binary
value in V1420 using the Add Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT 5 Use either OR Constant
V-memory
V1400
X1 0 A 0 5
LD LD
V1400 K2565

Load the value in V1400

into the lower 16 bits of BIN The unused accumulator
the accumulator bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 0 A 0 5 (Accumulator)

ADDB + 1 2 C 4 (V1420)

V1420 Acc. 1 C C 9
The binary value in the
accumulator is added to the
binary value in V1420

OUTD 1 C C 9
V1500
V1500
Copy the value in the lower
16bits of the accumulator to
V1500 and V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR X(IN) 1 ENT

SHFT L D V 1 4 0 0 ENT

SHFT A D D B V 1 4 2 0 ENT

OUT SHFT D V 1 5 0 0 ENT

5-78 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Subtract Binary (SUBB)

DS5 Used
Subtract Binary is a 16 bit instruction that subtracts the S UBB
HPP Used binary value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location A aaa
or a 4-digit (max.) binary constant, from the binary value
in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP64 On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a borrow
SP65 On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a borrow
SP70 On any time the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is subtracted from the binary value in
the accumulator using the Subtract Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied
to V1500 using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display Use either OR Constant
V-memory

X1 LD LD
V1400 K1024
V1400
Load the value in V1400
into the lower 16 bits of BIN 1 0 2 4
the accumulator

SUBB The unused accumulator

V1420 bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 1 0 2 4 (Accumulator)
The binary value in V1420 is
subtracted from the value in
the accumulator
- 0 A 0 B (V1420)

Acc. 0 6 1 9
OUT
V1500

Copy the value in the lower 16

bits of the accumulator to V1500
0 6 1 9

V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR X(IN) 1 ENT

SHFT L D V 1 4 0 0 ENT

SHFT S SHFT U B B

V 1 4 2 0 ENT

OUT SHFT D V 1 5 0 0 ENT

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-79
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Multiply Binary (MULB)

DS5 Used
Multiply Binary is a 16 bit instruction that multiplies the
binary value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or MULB
HPP Used
a 4-digit (max.) binary constant, by the binary value in the A aaa
accumulator. The result can be up to 32 bits and resides in
the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 1–FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On any time the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by the binary value in the
accumulator using the Multiply Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
Use either OR Constant
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display V-memory

X1 V1400
LD
LD 0 A 0 1
V1400 K2561
Load the value in V1400
into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator BIN
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 0 A 0 1 (Accumulator)
MULB
x 0 0 2 E (V1420)
V1420
Acc. 0 0 0 1 C C 2 E
The binary value in V1420 is
multiplied by the binary
value in the accumulator

OUTD
V1500 0 0 0 1 C C 2 E

Copy the value of the accumulator V1501 V1500

to V1500 and V1501

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR X 1 ENT

SHFT L D V 1 4 0 0 ENT

SHFT M U L B V 1 4 2 0 ENT

OUT SHFT D V 1 5 0 0 ENT

5-80 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Divide Binary (DIVB)
DS5 Used
Divide Binary is a 16 bit instruction that divides the binary
HPP Used
value in the accumulator by a binary value (Aaaa), which is DIVB
either a V-memory location or a 16-bit (max.) binary constant. A aaa
The first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator and
the remainder resides in the first stack location.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0–FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value
in V1420 using the Divide Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 using the Out instruction.
Use either OR Constant
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Display V-memory

X1 V1400
LD LDD
F A 0 1
V1400 K64001

Load the value in V1400

into the lower 16 bits of BIN
the accumulator The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 F A 0 1 (Accumulator)
DIVB
_.. 0 0 5 0 (V1420)
V1420

The binary value in th Acc. 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

accumulator is divided by
the binary value in V1420 First stack location contains
the remainder
OUT
V1500 0 3 2 0

Copy the value in the lower 16 V1500

bits of the accumulator to V1500

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

STR X 1 ENT

SHFT L D V 1 4 0 0 ENT

SHFT D I V B V 1 4 2 0 ENT

OUT SHFT D V 1 5 0 0 ENT

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-81
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Bit Operation Instructions

Sum (SUM)
SUM
The Sum instruction counts number of bits that are set
DS5 Used to “1” in the accumulator. The HEX result resides in
HPP Used the accumulator.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X10–X17 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The number of bits in the
accumulator set to “1” is counted using the Sum instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Display
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
X1 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
LDF X10
K8 The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Load the value represented by
discrete locations X10–X17
into the accumulator 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5
SUM

Sum the number of bits in

the accumulator set to “1”

OUT 0 0 0 5
V1500
V1500
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
to V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D F B A I ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 8

SHFT S SHFT U M ENT

RST ISG ORST
GX PREV PREV PREV B F A A ENT
OUT 1 5 0 0

5-82 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard
Chapter
RLL5:- Standard
Bit Operation
RLL Instructions

Shift Left (SHFL)

SHFL
DS5 Used Shift Left is a 32 bit instruction that shifts the bits in the
A aaa
HPP Used accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the
left. The vacant positions are filled with zeros and the bits
shifted out of the accumulator are discarded.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 1-32

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is
shifted 2 bits to the left using the Shift Left instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied
to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
V2001 V2000
X1 LDD 6 7 0 5 33 31 10 01

V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SHFL Acc. 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
K2

The bit pattern in the

accumulator is shifted 2 bit
positions to the left Shifted out of the
. . . .
accumulator

OUTD
V2010
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Copy the value in the Acc. 0
1 0 0 0
1 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

9 C 1 4 C 4 0 4

V2011 V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT S SHFT H F L C ENT

RST 7 5 ANDST 2
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-83
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Shift Right (SHFR)

DS5 Used
Shift Right is a 32 bit instruction that shifts the bits in the SHFR
HPP Used
accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the right. The A aaa
vacant positions are filled with zeros and the bits shifted out of the
accumulator are lost.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 1-32

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is
shifted 2 bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.

DirectSOFT

Direct SOFT32 V2001 V2000

X1 Constant 6 7 0 5 33 11 00 11
LDD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SHFR Acc. 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
K2

... .
The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 2 bit
positions to the right Shifted out of the
accumulator

OUTD
V2010 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Copy the value in the Acc. 0 0 0 0

1 0
1 1
0 0 0
1 0
1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

1 9 C 1 4 C 4 0

V2011 V2010

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT S SHFT H F R C ENT

RST 7 5 ORN 2
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

5-84 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Encode (ENCO)
DS5 Used The Encode instruction encodes the bit position in the
HPP Used accumulator having a value of 1, and returns the appropriate
binary representation. If the most significant bit is set to 1 (Bit ENCO
31), the Encode instruction would place the value HEX 1F
(decimal 31) in the accumulator. If the value to be encoded
is 0000 or 0001, the instruction will place a zero in the
accumulator. If the value to be encoded has more than one bit
position set to a “1”, the least significant “1” will be encoded
and SP53 will be set on.
Discrete Bit Flags Description
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.

In the following example, when X1 is on, The value in V2000 is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The bit position set to a “1” in the accumulator is encoded to the
corresponding 5 bit binary value using the Encode instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2000
1 0 0 0
X1 LD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 into

the lower 16 bits of the 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bit postion 12 is
converted
to binary

ENCO

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Encode the bit position set
to “1” in the accumulator to a Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 bit binary value

OUT
V2010

Copy the value in the lower 16 bits 0 0 0 C

of the accumulator to V2010
V2010 Binary value
for 12.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT E N C O ENT
4 TMR 2 INST#
GX SHFT V C A B A ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-85
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Decode (DECO)
DS5 Used The Decode instruction decodes a 5 bit binary value of 0–31
HPP Used (0–1F HEX) in the accumulator by setting the appropriate bit DECO
position to a 1. If the accumulator contains the value F (HEX),
bit 15 will be set in the accumulator. If the value to be decoded
is greater than 31, the number is divided by 32 until the value is
less than 32 and then the value is decoded.
In the following example when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X10–X14 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The five bit binary pattern
in the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit position to a “1” using the
Decode instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
X1 LDF X10 OFF ON OFF ON ON

K5

Load the value in

represented by discrete
locations X10–X14 into the
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
accumulator
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

The binary vlaue

is converted to
bit position 11.
DECO

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Decode the five bit binary Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
pattern in the accumulator
and set the corresponding
bit position to a “1”

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D F B A F ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 5

SHFT D E C O ENT
3 4 2 INST#

5-86 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)

Binary (BIN)
BIN
The Binary instruction converts a BCD value in the
DS5 Used accumulator to the equivalent binary value. The result
HPP Used resides in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BCD value in the accumulator is
converted to the binary (HEX) equivalent using the BIN instruction. The binary value in the
accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction. (The handheld
programmer will display the binary value in V2010 and V2011 as a HEX value.)

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
SP75 On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON–BCD number was encountered.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 V2001 V2000

X1 0 0 0 2 8 5 2 9
LDD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

BCD Value

28529 = 16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1

BIN Binary Equivalent Value

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Convert the BCD value in Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
the accumulator to the
binary equivalent value 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1
1 0 3 6 3 7 3 6 3 1 0 0 2 6 3 5 2 6 1 0 0 0 1 5 2 4 2 6
4 7 6 8 4 1 5 7 8 9 9 4 4 2 1 5 7 3 9 9 4 2 2 6 8
7 3 8 4 2 0 5 7 8 4 7 8 2 1 0 3 6 8 2 6 8 4
4 7 7 3 1 8 4 7 6 3 1 5 8 4 7 6 8 4
4 4 0 5 7 8 4 2 0 0 5 7 8 4 2
8 1 9 4 7 6 3 1 8 4 2 6
3 8 1 5 2 4 2 6
6 2 2 6 8
4 4
8

OUTD
V2010 The Binary (HEX)
0 0 0 0 6 F 7 1 value copied to
Copy the binary data in the
V2010
accumulator to V2010 and V2011 V2011 V2010
Standard RLL
Instructions

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT B I N ENT
1 8 TMR

GX D C A B A
SHFT ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-87
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)

The Binary Coded Decimal instruction converts a binary value in BCD
DS5 Used
HPP Used the accumulator to the equivalent BCD value. The result resides
in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary (HEX) value in V2000 and V2001 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in the
accumulator is converted to the BCD equivalent value using the BCD instruction. The BCD
value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
Discrete Bit Flags Description
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 V2001 V2000

X1 0 0 0 0 6 F 7 1
LDD
V2000 Binary Value

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1
2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1 5 2 1 6 3 1 8 4 2 1
1 0 3 6 3 7 3 6 3 1 0 0 2 6 3 5 2 6 1 0 0 0 1 5 2 4 2 6
4 7 6 8 4 1 5 7 8 9 9 4 4 2 1 5 7 3 9 9 4 2 2 6 8
7 3 8 4 2 0 5 7 8 4 7 8 2 1 0 3 6 8 2 6 8 4
4 7 7 3 1 8 4 7 6 3 1 5 8 4 7 6 8 4
4 4 0 5 7 8 4 2 0 0 5 7 8 4 2
8 1 9 4 7 6 3 1 8 4 2 6
3 8 1 5 2 4 2 6
6 2 2 6 8
4 4
8

BCD
16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1 = 28529

Convert the binary value in BCD Equivalent Value

the accumulator to the BCD
equivalent value 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1

OUTD
V2010

Copy the BCD value in the 0 0 0 2 8 5 2 9 The BCD value

accumulator to V2010 and V2011 copied to
V2011 V2010 V2010 and V2011

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1
L D D C A A A
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0
B C D
SHFT ENT
1 2 3

GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

5-88 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Invert (INV)
DS5 Used The Invert instruction inverts or takes the one’s complement INV
HPP Used of the 32 bit value in the accumulator. The result resides in
the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is inverted
using the Invert instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using
the Out Double instruction.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 V2001 V2000

X1 0 4 0 5 00 22 55 00
LDD
V2000

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

INV
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
Invert the binary bit pattern
in the accumulator

OUTD F B F A F D A F
V2010 V2011 V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT I N V ENT
8 TMR AND
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-89
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ASCII to HEX (ATH)

The ASCII TO HEX instruction converts a table of ASCII values to a specified table of HEX
DS5 Used values. ASCII values are two digits and their HEX equivalents
HPP Used are one digit. This means an ASCII table of four V-memory
locations would only require two V-memory locations for the ATH
equivalent HEX table. The function parameters are loaded V aaa
into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two
additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary
to program an ASCII to HEX table function. The example
on the following page shows a program for the ASCII to HEX
table function.
Step 1: — Load the number of V-memory locations for the ASCII table into the first level of
the accumulator stack.
Step 2: — Load the starting V-memory location for the ASCII table into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: — Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the HEX table in the ATH
instruction.
Helpful Hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,
the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load
the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

In the example on the following page, when X1 is ON the constant (K4) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction and will be placed in the first level of the accumulator
stack when the next Load instruction is executed. The starting location for the ASCII table
(V1400) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The starting
location for the HEX table (V1600) is specified in the ASCII to HEX instruction. The table
below lists valid ASCII values for ATH conversion.
ASCII Values Valid for ATH Conversion
ASCII Value HEX Value ASCII Value HEX Value
30 0 38 8
31 1 39 9
32 2 41 A
33 3 42 B
34 4 43 C
35 5 44 D
36 6 45 E
37 7 46 F

5-90 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Hexadecimal
ASCII TABLE Equivalents
X1 LD Load the constant value
into the lower 16 bits of the
K4 accumulator. This value
defines the number of V
memory location in the
ASCII table
V1400 33 34
LDA Convert octal 1400 to HEX

O 1400
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
1234 V1600

V1401 31 32
ATH V1600 is the starting
location for the HEX table
V1600

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$
STR
B
1
ENT V1402 37 38
SHFT L
ANDST
D
3
PREV E
4
ENT 5678 V1601

L D A B E A A
SHFT
ANDST 3 0 1 4 0 0
ENT
V1403 35 36
SHFT A T H B G A A ENT
0 MLR 7 1 6 0 0

HEX to ASCII (HTA)

The HEX to ASCII instruction converts a table HTA
DS5 Used
of HEX values to a specified table of ASCII V aaa
HPP Used
values. HEX values are one digit and their ASCII
equivalents are two digits.
This means a HEX table of two V-memory locations would require four V-memory locations
for the equivalent ASCII table. The function parameters are loaded into the accumulator stack
and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to
program a HEX to ASCII table function. The example on the following page shows a program
for the HEX to ASCII table function.
Step 1: — Load the number of V-memory locations in the HEX table into the first level of the
accumulator stack.
Step 2: — Load the starting V-memory location for the HEX table into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: — Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the ASCII table in the HTA
instruction.
Helpful Hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,
the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load
the value into the accumulator.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-91
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

In the following example, when X1 is ON the constant (K2) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The starting location for the HEX table (V1500) is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The starting location for the ASCII table
(V1400) is specified in the HEX to ASCII instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
Hexadecimal
X1 LD Equivalents ASCII TABLE
K2

Load the constant value into

the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. This value
defines the number of V 33 34 V1400
locations in the HEX table.
V1500 1234
LDA
O 1500
31 32 V1401

Convert octal 1500 to HEX

340 and load the value into
the accumulator

HTA 37 38 V1402
V1400

V1400 is the starting

V1501 5678
location for the ASCII table.
The conversion is executed
by this instruction.
35 36 V1403

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D SHFT K E ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 4

SHFT L D A B F A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 1 5 0 0

SHFT H T A B E A A ENT
7 MLR 0 1 4 0 0

The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion.
ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion
Hex Value ASCII Value Hex Value ASCII Value
0 30 8 38
1 31 9 39
2 32 A 41
3 33 B 42
4 34 C 43
5 35 D 44
6 36 E 45
7 37 F 46

5-92 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Gray Code (GRAY)

DS5 Used The Gray code instruction converts a 16 bit gray code
HPP Used value to a BCD value. The BCD conversion requires 10
bits of the accumulator. The upper 22 bits are set to “0”.
This instruction is designed for use with devices (typically
GRAY
encoders) that use the grey code numbering scheme. The
Gray Code instruction will directly convert a gray code
number to a BCD number for devices having a resolution
of 512 or 1024 counts per revolution. If a device having
a resolution of 360 counts per revolution is to be used
you must subtract a BCD value of 76 from the converted
value to obtain the proper result. For a device having a
resolution of 720 counts per revolution you must subtract
a BCD value of 152.
In the following example, when X1 is ON the binary value represented by X10–X27 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The gray code value in the
accumulator is converted to BCD using the Gray Code instruction. The value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator is copied to V2010.
Discrete Bit Flags Description
SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X27 X26 X25 X12 X11 X10
X1 LDF K16 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON

X10

Load the value represented

by X10–X27 into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
GRAY

Convert the 16 bit grey code

value in the accumulator to a
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BCD value
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
OUT
V2010

Copy the value in the lower

16 bits of the accumulator to Gray Code BCD
V2010
0000000000 0000 0 0 0 6

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes 0000000001 0001 V2010

0000000011 0002
$ B ENT
STR 1 0000000010 0003
L D F B A B G 0000000110 0004
SHFT ENT
ANDST 3 5 1 0 1 6
0000000111 0005
SHFT G R A Y ENT
6 ORN 0 MLS 0000000101 0006

GX V C A B A 0000000100 0007
SHFT ENT
OUT AND 2 0 1 0

1000000001 1022
1000000000 1023

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-93
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Shuffle Digits (SFLDGT)

The Shuffle Digits instruction shuffles a maximum of 8 SFLDGT
DS5 Used
HPP Used digits rearranging them in a specified order. This function
requires parameters to be loaded into the first level of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions. Listed below are the
steps necessary to use the shuffle digit function. The example on the following page shows a
program for the Shuffle Digits function.
Step 1:— Load the value (digits) to be shuffled into the first level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2:— Load the order that the digits will be shuffled to into the accumulator.
Step 3:— Insert the SFLDGT instruction.
NOTE: If the number used to specify the order contains a 0 or 9-F, the corresponding position will be set
to 0.

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP63 On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
SP70 On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.

Shuffle Digits Block Diagram Digits to be

shuffled (first stack location)
There are a maximum of 8 digits that can be
shuffled. The bit positions in the first level of 9 A B C D E F 0
the accumulator stack defines the digits to be
shuffled. They correspond to the bit positions in
the accumulator that define the order the digits will 1 2 8 7 3 6 5 4
be shuffled. The digits are shuffled and the result
resides in the accumulator. Specified order (accumulator)

Bit Positions 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

B C E F 0 D A 9

Result (accumulator)

5-94 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example when X1 is on, The value in the first level of the accumulator stack
will be reorganized in the order specified by the value in the accumulator.
Example A shows how the shuffle digits works when 0 or 9 –F is not used when specifying the
order the digits are to be shuffled. Also, there are no duplicate numbers in the specified order.
Example B shows how the shuffle digits works when a 0 or 9–F is used when specifying the
order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits instruction is executed, the
bit positions in the first stack location that had a corresponding 0 or 9–F in the accumulator
(order specified) are set to “0”.
Example C shows how the shuffle digits works when duplicate numbers are used specifying the
order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits instruction is executed, the
most significant duplicate number in the order specified is used in the result.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
A B C
X1 LDD V2001 V2000 V2001 V2000 V2001 V2000
V2000 9 A B C D E F 0 0 F E D C B A 9 9 A B C D E F 0

Load the value in V2000 and

V2001 into the accumulator
Original 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
bit
Positions 9 A B C D E F 0 Acc. 0 F E D C B A 9 Acc. 9 A B C D E F 0 Acc.

V2007 V2006 V2007 V2006 V2007 V2006

LDD
V2006 1 2 8 7 3 6 5 4 0 0 4 3 0 0 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1

Load the value in V2006 and

V2007 into the accumulator Specified 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
order
1 2 8 7 3 6 5 4 Acc. 0 0 4 3 0 0 2 1 Acc. 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 Acc.

New bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SFLDGT Positions
B C E F 0 D A 9 Acc. 0 0 0 0 E D A 9 Acc. 0 0 0 0 9 A B C Acc.

Shuf fle the digits in the first

level of the accumulator
stack based on the pattern
in the accumulator. The
result is in the accumulator .

OUTD
B C E F 0 D A 9 0 0 0 0 E D A 9 0 0 0 0 9 A B C
V2010
V2011 V2010 V2011 V2010 V2011 V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT L D D C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 0

SHFT L D D C A A G ENT
ANDST 3 3 2 0 0 6

SHFT S SHFT F L D G T ENT

RST 5 ANDST 3 6 MLR
GX SHFT D C A B A ENT
OUT 3 2 0 1 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-95
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Table Instructions
Move (MOV)
The Move instruction moves the values from a V-memory
table to another V-memory table the same length (a table is MOV
DS5 Used V aaa
a consecutive group of V-memory locations). The function
HPP Used
parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator
stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions.
The MOV instruction can be used to write data to non-volatile V-memory (see Appendix F).
Listed below are the steps necessary to program the MOV function.
Step 1:— Load the number of V-memory locations to be moved into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter is a HEX value (K40 max, 100 octal).
Step 2:— Load the starting V-memory location for the locations to be moved into the
accumulator. This parameter is a HEX value.
Step 3:— Insert the MOVE instruction which specifies starting V-memory location (Vaaa)
for the destination table.
Helpful Hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,
the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load
the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠P See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP53 On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 2000 (V2000),
the starting location for the source table is loaded into the accumulator. The destination table
location (V2030) is specified in the Move instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32

X1 Load the constant value 6

LD (HEX) into the lower 16 bits X X X X V2026
K6 of the accumulator
X X X X V2027
Convert octal 2000 to HEX 0 1 2 3 V2000 0 1 2 3 V2030
LDA 400 and load the value into
O 2000 the accumulator 0 5 0 0 V2001 0 5 0 0 V2031
9 9 9 9 V2002 9 9 9 9 V2032
Copy the specified table
MOV locations to a table 3 0 7 4 V2003 3 0 7 4 V2033
V2030 beginning at location V2030
8 9 8 9 V2004 8 9 8 9 V2034
1 0 1 0 V2005 1 0 1 0 V2035
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X X X X V2006 X X X X V2036
$ B ENT
STR 1 X X X X V2007 X X X X V2037

SHFT L D SHFT K G ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 6

SHFT L D A C A A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 0 0 0

SHFT M O V C A D A ENT
ORST INST# AND 2 0 3 0

5-96 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Move Memory Cartridge (MOVMC) and

Load Label (LDLBL)
The Move Memory Cartridge and the Load Label instructions are
DS5 Used
used to copy data from program ladder memory to V-memory. The MOVMC
HPP Used
Load Label instruction is used with the MOVMC instruction when V aaa
copying data from program ladder memory to V-memory.
To copy data from the program ladder memory to V-memory,
the function parameters are loaded into the first two levels of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions.
LDLBL
Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Move Memory
K aaa
Cartridge and Load Label functions.
Step 1:— Load the number of words to be copied into the second
level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2:— Load the offset for the data label area in ladder memory and the beginning of the
V-memory block into the first level of the stack.
Step 3:— Load the source data label (LDLBL Kaaa) into the accumulator when copying
data from ladder memory to V-memory. This is the source location of the value.
Step 4:— Insert the MOVMC instruction which specifies destination in V-memory (Vaaa).
This is the copy destination.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-97
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Copy Data From a Data Label Area to V-memory

In the example to the right, data is copied from a Data Label Area to V-memory. When X1 is
on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This
value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location after the next
Load and Load Label (LDLBL) instructions are executed. The constant value (K0) is loaded
into the accumulator, specifying the offset for the source and destination data. It is placed in the
first stack location after the LDLBL instruction is executed. The source address where data is
being copied from is loaded into the accumulator using the LDLBL instruction. The MOVMC
instruction specifies the destination starting location and executes the copying of data from the
Data Label Area to V-memory.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
Data label area X1
programmed after LD
the END instruction K4
.
DLBL K1 . Load the value 4 into the
accumulator specifying the
N C O N 1 2 3 4 V2000 number of locations to be
copied.
K 1 2 3 4

N C O N 4 5 3 2 V2001 LD
K 4 5 3 2 K0

N C O N 6 1 5 1 V2002 Load the value 0 into the

K 6 1 5 1 accumulator specifying the
offset for source and
N C O N 8 8 4 5 V2003 destination locations
K 8 8 4 5
LDLBL
X X X X V2004 K1
.
. Load the value 1 into the
accumulator specifying the
Data Label Area K1 as the
starting address of the data
to be copied.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
MOVMC
$ B ENT
STR 1 V2000

SHFT L D SHFT K E ENT V2000 is the destination

ANDST 3 JMP 4 starting address for the data
to be copied.
SHFT L D SHFT K A ENT
ANDST 3 JMP 0

SHFT L D L B L B ENT
ANDST 3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1

SHFT M O V M C C A A A ENT
ORST INST# AND ORST 2 2 0 0 0

5-98 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CPU Control Instructions

No Operation (NOP)
The No Operation is an empty (not programmed) memory location. NOP
DS5 Used
HPP N/A DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT N O P ENT
NOP TMR INST# CV

End (END)
The End instruction marks the termination point of the normal program
DS5 Used
scan. An End instruction is required at the end of the main program END
HPP N/A
body. If the End instruction is omitted an error will occur and the CPU
will not enter the Run Mode. Data labels, subroutines and interrupt
routines are placed after the End instruction. The End instruction is not
conditional; therefore, no input contact is allowed.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3
END

Stop (STOP)
DS5 Used The Stop instruction changes the operational mode of the CPU from STOP
HPP N/A Run to Program (Stop) mode. This instruction is typically used to
stop PLC operation in an error condition.
In the following example, when C0 turns on, the CPU will stop
operation and switch to the program mode.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

C0 $ SHFT C A ENT
STR 2 0
STOP S T O P
SHFT SHFT ENT
RST MLR INST# CV

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP16 On when the DL05 goes into the TERM_PRG mode.
SP53 On when the DL05 goes into the PRG mode.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-99
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Reset Watch Dog Timer (RSTWT)

DS5 Used
The Reset Watch Dog Timer instruction resets the CPU scan
HPP N/A
timer. The default setting for the watch dog timer is 200ms.
Scan times very seldom exceed 200ms, but it is possible. RSTWT
For/next loops, subroutines, interrupt routines, and table
instructions can be programmed such that the scan becomes
longer than 200ms. When instructions are used in a manner
that could exceed the watch dog timer setting, this instruction
can be used to reset the timer.
A software timeout error (E003) will occur and the CPU will enter the program mode if the
scan time exceeds the watch dog timer setting. Placement of the RSTWT instruction in the
program is very important. The instruction has to be executed before the scan time exceeds the
watch dog timer’s setting.
If the scan time is consistently longer than the watch dog timer’s setting, the timeout value
may be permanently increased from the default value of 200ms by AUX 55 on the HPP or the
appropriate auxiliary function in your programming package. This eliminates the need for the
RSTWT instruction.
In the following example the CPU scan timer will be reset to 0 when the RSTWT instruction
is executed. See the For/Next instruction for a detailed example.
Direct SOFT 32
DirectSOFT Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT R S T W T ENT
ORN RST MLR ANDN MLR
RSTWT

5-100 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Program Control Instructions

For / Next (FOR) (NEXT)
The For and Next instructions are used to execute a section of ladder
DS5 Used logic between the For and Next instruction a specified numbers
HPP Used A aaa
of times. When the For instruction is enabled, the program will
FOR
loop the specified number of times. If the For instruction is not
energized the section of ladder logic between the For and Next
instructions is not executed.
For / Next instructions cannot be nested. The normal I/O update
and CPU housekeeping is suspended while executing the For / Next
loop. The program scan can increase significantly, depending on the
amount of times the logic between the For and Next instruction is
executed. With the exception of immediate I/O instructions, I/O NEXT
will not be updated until the program execution is completed for
that scan. Depending on the length of time required to complete
the program execution, it may be necessary to reset the watch dog
timer inside of the For / Next loop using the RSTWT instruction.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 1-9999

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-101
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, the application program inside the For / Next loop
will be executed three times. If X1 is off the program inside the loop will not be executed. The
immediate instructions may or may not be necessary depending on your application. Also, The
RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For / Next loop does not extend the scan time larger
the Watch Dog Timer setting. For more information on the Watch Dog Timer, refer to the
RSTWT instruction.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X1 1 2 3
K3

FOR

RSTWT

X20 Y5
OUT

NEXT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT F O R D ENT
5 INST# ORN 3

SHFT R S T W T ENT
ORN RST MLR ANDN MLR
$ SHFT I C A ENT
STR 8 2 0
GX F ENT
OUT 5

SHFT N E X T ENT
TMR 4 SET MLR

5-102 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SBR)

DS5 Used The Goto Subroutine instruction allows a section of ladder K aaa
HPP Used logic to be placed outside the main body of the program
GTS
execute only when needed. There can be a maximum of 64
GTS instructions and 64 SBR instructions used in a program.
The GTS instructions can be nested up to 8 levels. An error
E412 will occur if the maximum limits are exceeded. Typically
this will be used in an application where a block of program
logic may be slow to execute and is not required to execute
SBR K aaa
every scan. The subroutine label and all associated logic is
placed after the End statement in the program. When the
subroutine is called from the main program, the CPU will
execute the subroutine (SBR) with the same constant number
(K) as the GTS instruction which called the subroutine.
By placing code in a subroutine it is only scanned and executed when needed since it resides
after the End instruction. Code which is not scanned does not impact the overall scan time of
the program.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 1-FFFF

Subroutine Return (RT)

DS5 Used When a Subroutine Return is executed in the subroutine the
HPP Used CPU will return to the point in the main body of the program RT
from which it was called. The Subroutine Return is used as
termination of the subroutine which must be the last instruction
in the subroutine and is a stand alone instruction (no input
contact on the rung).
Subroutine Return Conditional (RTC)
DS5 Used The Subroutine Return Conditional instruction is a optional RTC
HPP Used instruction used with a input contact to implement a conditional
return from the subroutine. The Subroutine Return (RT) is still
required for termination of the Subroutine.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-103
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will jump to
the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. If X35 is on
the CPU will return to the main program at the RTC instruction. If X35 is not on Y0–Y17 will
be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the program.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Display X1 K3
GTS
C0
LD
K10

END

SBR K3

X20 Y5
OUTI

X21 Y10
OUTI

X35
RTC

X35 Y0 Y17
RSTI

RT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT G T S D ENT
6 MLR RST 3
?
?

SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3

SHFT S SHFT B R D ENT

RST 1 ORN 3
$ SHFT I C A ENT
STR 8 2 0
GX SHFT I F ENT
OUT 8 5
$ SHFT I C B ENT
STR 8 2 1
GX SHFT I B A ENT
OUT 8 1 0
$ SHFT I D F ENT
STR 8 3 5

SHFT R T C ENT
ORN MLR 2
SP SHFT I D F ENT
STRN 8 3 5
S SHFT I A B H ENT
RST 8 0 1 7

SHFT R T ENT
ORN MLR

5-104 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will jump to
the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. The CPU will
return to the main body of the program after the RT instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT 32

X1 K3

GTS

END

SBR K3

X20 Y5

OUT

X21 Y10

OUT

RT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1

SHFT G T S D ENT
6 MLR RST 3




SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3

SHFT S SHFT B R D ENT

RST 1 ORN 3
$ SHFT I C A ENT
STR 8 2 0
GX F ENT
OUT 5
$ SHFT I C B ENT
STR 8 2 1
GX B A ENT
OUT 1 0

SHFT R T ENT
ORN MLR

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-105
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Master Line Set (MLS)

DS5 Used The Master Line Set instruction allows the program to control
HPP Used sections of ladder logic by forming a new power rail controlled by K aaa
the main left power rail. The main left rail is always master line 0. MLS
When a MLS K1 instruction is used, a new power rail is created
at level 1. Master Line Sets and Master Line Resets can be used
to nest power rails up to seven levels deep.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 1-7

DS5 Used Master Line Reset (MLR) K aaa

HPP Used The Master Line Reset instruction marks the end of control for MLR
the corresponding MLS instruction. The MLR reference is one
less than the corresponding MLS.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0-7

Understanding Master Control Relays

The Master Line Set (MLS) and Master Line Reset (MLR) instructions allow you to quickly
enable (or disable) sections of the RLL program. This provides program control flexibility. The
following example shows how the MLS and MLR instructions operate by creating a sub power
rail for control logic.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32
X0 K1
When contact X0 is ON, logic under the first MLS
MLS will be executed.

X1 Y7
OUT

X2 K2
When contact X0 and X2 are ON, logic under the
MLS
second MLS will be executed.

X3 Y10
OUT

K1
MLR
The MLR instructions note the end of the Master
K0 Control area.
MLR

X10 Y11
OUT

5-106 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

MLS/MLR Example
In the following MLS/MLR example logic between the first MLS K1 (A) and MLR K0 (B)
will function only if input X0 is on. The logic between the MLS K2 (C) and MLR K1 (D) will
function only if input X10 and X0 is on. The last rung is not controlled by either of the MLS
coils.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X0 K1
A $ A ENT
MLS STR 0
Y B ENT
X1 C0 MLS 1

OUT $ B ENT
STR 1

X2 C1 GX SHFT C A ENT
OUT 2 0
OUT
$ C ENT
STR 2
X3 Y0
GX SHFT C B ENT
OUT OUT 2 1
$ D ENT
X10 K2 STR 3
C
GX A ENT
MLS
OUT 0

X5 $ B A ENT
Y1
STR 1 0
OUT Y C ENT
MLS 2
X4 Y2 $ F ENT
STR 5
OUT
GX B ENT
OUT 1
K1
D $ E
MLR ENT
STR 4
GX C ENT
X5 C2 OUT 2
OUT T B ENT
MLR 1
X6 Y3 $ F ENT
STR 5
OUT
GX SHFT C C ENT
OUT 2 2
K0
B
$ G ENT
MLR STR 6
GX D ENT
X7 Y4 OUT 3
OUT T A ENT
MLR 0
$ H ENT
STR 7
GX E C ENT
OUT 4 2

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-107
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Interrupt Instructions
Interrupt (INT)
The Interrupt instruction allows a section of ladder logic INT O aaa
DS5 Used to be placed below the main body of the program and
HPP Used executed only when needed. High-Speed I/O Modes
10, 20, and 40 can generate an interrupt. With Mode INT 1
40, you may select an external interrupt (input X0), or a
time-based interrupt (5–999 ms).
Typically, interrupts are used in an application when a
fast response to an input is needed or a program section must execute faster than the normal
CPU scan. The interrupt label and all associated logic must be placed after the End statement
in the program. When an interrupt occurs, the CPU will complete execution of the current
instruction it is processing in ladder logic, then execute the interrupt routine. After interrupt
routine execution, the ladder program resumes from the point at which it was interrupted.
See Chapter 3, the section on Mode 40 (Interrupt) Operation for more details on interrupt
configuration. In the DL05, only one hardware interrupt is available.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠O 0, 1

Interrupt Return (IRT)

An Interrupt Return is normally executed as the last instruction
DS5 Used in the interrupt routine. It returns the CPU to the point in the
HPP Used IRT
main program from which it was called. The Interrupt Return is
a stand-alone instruction (no input contact on the rung).
Interrupt Return Conditional (IRTC)
DS5 Used The Interrupt Return Conditional instruction is a optional
HPP Used instruction used with an input contact to implement a IRTC
conditional return from the interrupt routine. The Interrupt
Return is required to terminate the interrupt routine.
Enable Interrupts (ENI)
DS5 Used The Enable Interrupt instruction is placed in the main ladder
program (before the End instruction), enabling the interrupt. ENI
HPP Used
The interrupt remains enabled until the program executes a
Disable Interrupt instruction.

5-108 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Disable Interrupts (DISI)

DS5 Used A Disable Interrupt instruction in the main body of the
HPP Used application program (before the End instruction) will disable DISI
the interrupt (either external or timed). The interrupt remains
disabled until the program executes an Enable Interrupt
instruction.

External Interrupt Program Example

In the following example, we do some initialization on the first scan, using the first-scan
contact SP0. The interrupt feature is the HSIO Mode 40. Then we configure X0 as the external
interrupt by writing to its configuration register, V7634. See Chapter 3, Mode 40 Operation
for more details.
During program execution, when X2 is on the interrupt is enabled. When X2 is off the interrupt
will be disabled. When an interrupt signal (X0) occurs the CPU will jump to the interrupt label
INT O 0. The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed. The CPU
will return to the main body of the program after the IRT instruction is executed.

DirectSOFT

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SP0 LD Load the constant value
(K40) into the lower 16 bits $ SHFT SP A ENT
K40
of the accumulator STR STRN 0

SHFT L D SHFT K E A ENT

OUT Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to ANDST 3 JMP 4 0
V7633
V7633 GX V H G D D
SHFT ENT
OUT AND 7 6 3 3
LD Load the constant value (K4)
K4 into the lower 16 bits of the L D K E
SHFT SHFT ENT
accumulator ANDST 3 JMP 4

Copy the value in the lower GX SHFT V H G D E ENT

OUT OUT AND 7 6 3 4
V7634 16 bits of the accumulator to
V7634 $ C ENT
STR 2
X2
ENI SHFT E N I ENT
4 TMR 8
X2 SP C ENT
DISI STRN 2

SHFT D I S I ENT
3 8 RST 8

 
 

SHFT E N D ENT
END 4 TMR 3

SHFT I N T A ENT
8 TMR MLR 0
INT O0
$ SHFT I B ENT
STR 8 1
X1 Y5
X SHFT I F ENT
SETI SET 8 5
$ SHFT I D ENT
X3 Y7 STR 8 3
SETI
X SHFT I H ENT
SET 8 7

IRT SHFT I R T ENT

8 ORN MLR

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-109
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Timed Interrupt Program Example

In the following example, we do some initialization on the first scan, using the first-scan contact
SP0. The interrupt feature is the HSIO Mode 40. Then we configure the HSIO timer as a 10
ms interrupt by writing K104 to the configuration register for X0 (V7634). See Chapter 3,
Mode 40 Operation for more details.
When X4 turns on, the interrupt will be enabled. When X4 turns off, the interrupt will be
disabled. Every 10 ms the CPU will jump to the interrupt label INT O 0. The application
ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed. If X3 is not on Y0–Y7 will be reset to
off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the program.
DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SP0 Load the constant value
LD $ B
(K40) into the lower 16 bits ENT
K40 STR 1
of the accumulator
SHFT L D SHFT K E A ENT
ANDST 3 JMP 4 0

OUT Copy the value in the lower GX V H G D D

16 bits of the accumulator to SHFT ENT
OUT AND 7 6 3 3
V7633 V7633
SHFT L D SHFT K B A E ENT
ANDST 3 JMP 1 0 4

LD Load the constant value GX V H G D E

SHFT ENT
(K10) into the lower 16 bits OUT AND 7 6 3 4
K104 of the accumulator
$ E ENT
STR 4

OUT Copy the value in the lower SHFT E N I ENT

16 bits of the accumulator to 4 TMR 8
V7634 V7634
SP E ENT
STRN 4
X4
SHFT D I S I ENT
ENI 3 8 RST 8

X4
DISI
SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3

SHFT I N T A ENT
8 TMR MLR 0
END
$ SHFT I C ENT
STR 8 2
INT O0
X SHFT I F ENT
SET 8 5
SP SHFT I D ENT
X2 Y5 STRN 8 3
SETI X SHFT I A H ENT
SET 8 0 7

SHFT I R T ENT
X3 Y0 Y7 8 ORN MLR
RSTI

IRT

Independent Timed Interrupt

Interrupt O1 is also available as an interrupt. This interrupt is independent of the HSIO
features. Interrupt O1 uses an internal timer that is configured in V-memory location V7647.
The interrupt period can be adjusted from 5 to 9999 ms. Once the interrupt period is set and the
interrupt is enabled in the program, the CPU will continuously call the interrupt routine based on the time
setting in V7647.
Input Configuration Register Function Hex Code Required
– V7647 High-Speed Timed Interrupt xxxx (xxxx = timer setting) 5–9999 ms (BCD)

5-110 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Message Instructions
Fault (FAULT)
The Fault instruction is used to display a message on the handheld
DS5 Used programmer or in the DirectSOFT status bar. The message has FAULT
HPP Used a maximum of 23 characters and can be either V-memory data, A aaa
numerical constant data or ASCII text.
To display the value in a V-memory location, specify the V-memory location in the instruction.
To display the data in ACON (ASCII constant) or NCON (Numerical constant) instructions,
specify the constant (K) value for the corresponding data label area.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 1-FFFF

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP50 On when the FAULT instruction is executed

Fault Example
DS5 Used
In the following example when X1 is on, the message SW 146 will
HPP Used
display on the handheld programmer. The NCONs use the HEX FAULT :
*SW 146
ASCII equivalent of the text to be displayed. (The HEX ASCII for a
blank is 20, a 1 is 31, 4 is 34 ...)

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32 Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

X1 FAULT $ B ENT
K1 STR 1

SHFT F A U L T B ENT
5 0 ISG ANDST MLR 1

END

DLBL E N D
K1 SHFT ENT
4 TMR 3

SHFT D L B L B ENT
ACON
3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1
A SW
SHFT A C O N S W ENT
0 2 INST# TMR RST ANDN

SHFT N C O N C A D B ENT
NCON TMR 2 INST# TMR 2 0 3 1
K 2031
SHFT N C O N D E D G ENT
TMR 2 INST# TMR 3 4 3 6

NCON
K 3436

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-111
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Data Label (DLBL)

DS5 Used The Data Label instruction marks the beginning of
HPP Used an ASCII/numeric data area. DLBLs are programmed DLBL K aaa
after the End statement. A maximum of 64 DLBL
instructions can be used in a program. Multiple
NCONs and ACONs can be used in a DLBL area.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 1-FFFF

ASCII Constant (ACON)

DS5 Used The ASCII Constant instruction is used with the
ACON
HPP Used DLBL instruction to store ASCII text for use with
other instructions. Two ASCII characters can be stored A aaa
in an ACON instruction. If only one character is stored
in an ACON a leading space will be inserted.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A 0-9 A-Z

Numerical Constant (NCON)

DS5 Used The Numerical Constant instruction is used with the NCON
HPP Used DLBL instruction to store the HEX ASCII equivalent K aaa
of numerical data for use with other instructions. Two
digits can be stored in an NCON instruction.
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
aaa
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 0-FFFF

5-112 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Data Label Example

In the following example, an ACON and two NCON instructions are used within a DLBL
instruction to build a text message. See the FAULT instruction for information on displaying
messages. The DV-1000 Manual also has information on displaying messages.

DirectSOFT
Direct SOFT32

END

DLBL
K1

ACON
A SW

NCON
K 2031

NCON
K 3436

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes

SHFT E N D ENT
4 TMR 3

SHFT D L B L B ENT
3 ANDST 1 ANDST 1

SHFT A C O N S W ENT
0 2 INST# TMR RST ANDN

SHFT N C O N C A D B ENT
TMR 2 INST# TMR 2 0 3 1

SHFT N C O N D E D G ENT
TMR 2 INST# TMR 3 4 3 6

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-113
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Print Message (PRINT)

The Print Message instruction prints the embedded PRINT A aaa
DS5 Used
HPP N/A text or text/data variable message to the specified, “Hello, this is a PLC message”
configured, communications port (Port 2 on the DL05
CPU).
Operand Data Type DL05 Range
⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠A aaa
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K 2

You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 4 that the DL05’s ports are capable
of several protocols. Port 1 cannot be configured for the non-sequence protocol. To configure
port 2 using the Handheld Programmer, use AUX 56 and follow the prompts, making the same
choices as indicated below on this page. To configure a port in DirectSOFT, choose the PLC
> Setup > Setup Secondary Comm Port.
• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2”.
• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “Non-sequence”,
and then you’ll see the dialog box shown below.
• Baud Rate: Choose the baud
rate that matches your printer.
• Stop Bits, Parity: Choose
number of stop bits and parity
setting to match your printer.
• Memory Address: Please choose
a memory address with 64 words
of contiguous free memory for use
by the Non-Sequence Protocol.
NOTE: See Chapter 4 for a detail of the non-
sequence setup.

Then click the button indicated to send

the Port 2 configuration to the CPU, and
click Close. Then see Chapter 3 for port
wiring information, in order to connect
your printer to the DL05.

5-114 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Port 2 on the DL05 has standard RS232 levels, and should work with most printer serial input
connections.
Text element – this is used for printing character strings. The character strings are defined as
the character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two hex numbers preceded
by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code. Also, two characters preceded by the
dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table:
# Character code Description
1 $$ Dollar sign ($)
2 $” Double quotation (”)
3 $L or $l Line feed (LF)
4 $N or $n Carriage return line feed (CRLF)
5 $P or $p Form feed
6 $R or $r Carriage return (CR)
7 $T or $t Tab

The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the
printer.
Example:
” ” Length 0 without character
”A” Length 1 with character A
” ” Length 1 with blank
” $” ” Length 1 with double quotation mark
” $ R $ L ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF
” $ 0 D $ 0 A ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF
” $ $ ” Length 1 with one $ mark
In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks before
and after the text string. Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction
contains invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your PRINT instruction data
during the application development.
The following example prints the message to port 2. We use a PD contact, which causes the
message instruction to be active for just one scan. Note the $N at the end of the message, which
produces a carriage return / line feed on the printer. This prepares the printer to print the next
line, starting from the left margin.

X1 PRINT K2 Print the message to Port 2 when

“Hello, this is a PLC message.$N” X1 makes an off-to-on transition.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-115
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

V-memory element - this is used for printing V-memory contents in the integer format or real
format. Use V-memory number or V-memory number with “-” and data type. The data types
are shown in the table below. The Character code must be capital letters.
NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to separate it from the text
string. Failure to do this will result in an error code 499.

# Character code Description

1 none 16-bit binary (decimal number)
2 :B 4 digit BCD
3 :D 32-bit binary (decimal number)
4 :DB 8 digit BCD

Example:
V2000 Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number
V2000 : B Print BCD data in V2000
V2000 : D Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number
V2000 : D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001
Example: The following example prints a message containing text and a variable. The “reactor
temperature” labels the data, which is at V2000. You can use the : B qualifier after the V2000
if the data is in BCD format, for example. The final string adds the units of degrees to the line
of text, and the $N adds a carriage return / line feed.

X1 PRINT K2 Print the message to Port 2

“Reactor temperature = ” V2000 “deg. $N” when X1 makes an off-to-on
⊥ ⊥ transition.
⊥ represents a space
Message will read:
Reactor temperature = 0156 deg

V-memory text element ¨This is used for printing text stored in V-memory. Use the %
followed by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the text. If you
assign “0” as the number of characters, the print function will read the character count from the
first location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location and read that number of ASCII
codes for the text from memory.
Example:
V2000 % 16 16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed.
V2000 % 0 The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number in V2000) will
be printed.

5-116 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Bit element – this is used for printing the state of the designated bit in V-memory or a relay bit.
The bit element can be assigned by the designating point (.) and bit number preceded by the
V-memory number or relay number. The output type is described as shown in the table below.

# Data format Description

1 none Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an
OFF state
2 : BOOL Print “TRUE” for an ON state, and
“FALSE” for an OFF state
3 : ONOFF Print “ON” for an ON state, and
“OFF” for an OFF state

Example:
V2000.15 Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format
C100 Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format
C100 : BOOL Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format
C100 : ON/OFF Prints the status of C00 in ON/OFF format
V2000.15 : BOOL Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format
The maximum numbers of characters you can print is 128. The number of characters for each
element is listed in the table below:
Element Type Maximum Characters
Text, 1 character 1
16 bit binary 6
32 bit binary 11
4 digit BCD 4
8 digit BCD 8
Floating point (real number) 12
Floating point (real with exponent) 12
V-memory/text 2
Bit (1/0 format) 1
Bit (TRUE/FALSE format) 5
Bit (ON/OFF format) 3

The handheld programmer’s mnemonic is “PRINT,” followed by the DEF field.

Special relay flags SP116 and SP117 indicate the status of the DL05 CPU ports (busy, or
communications error). See the appendix on special relays for a description.
NOTE: You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT command to ensure
the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX
instruction.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-117
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Intelligent I/O Instructions

Read from Intelligent Module (RD)
The Read from Intelligent Module instruction reads a block of
DS32 Used
data (1-128 bytes maximum) from an intelligent I/O module
into the CPU’s V-memory. It loads the function parameters RD
HPP Used V aaa
into the first and second level of the accumulator stack and the
accumulator by three additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent
module function.
Step 1: S Load the base number (0-3) into the first byte and the slot number (0-7) into the
second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: S Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator
stack (maximum of 128 bytes).
Step 3: S Load the address from which the data will be read into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 4: S Insert the RD instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Vaaa)
where the data will be read into.
Helpful Hint: S Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent
and load it into the accumulator when the HEX format is required.
Operand Data Type DL06 Range
aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map
Discrete Bit Flags Description
SP54 On when RX, WX RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following example when X1 is ON, the RD instruction will read six bytes of data from a
intelligent module in base 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module and copy the
information into V-memory loacations V1400-V1402.
CPU Intelligent Module
Direct SOFT 5
Data

}
{
X1 The constant value K0102
LD specifies the base number V1400 3 4 1 2 12 Address 0
K0102 (01) and the base slot V1401 7 8 5 6 34 Address 1
number (02).
V1402 0 1 9 0 56 Address 2

LD The constant value K6 V1403 X X X X 78 Address 3

specifies the number of
K6 bytes to be read. V1404 X X X X 90 Address 4
01 Address 5

LD The constant value K0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
specifies the starting address
K0
in the intelligent module. $ B ENT
STR 1
V1400 is the starting location L D A B A C
RD SHFT PREV ENT
in the CPU where the specified ANDST 3 0 1 0 2
V1400 data will be stored.
SHFT L D PREV G
ENT
ANDST 3 6
L D A
SHFT PREV ENT
ANDST 3 0

R D B E A A
SHFT ENT
ORN 3 1 4 0 0

5-118 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Write to Intelligent Module (WT)

The Write to Intelligent Module instruction writes a block of
DS32 Used
data (1-128 bytes maximum) to an intelligent I/O module from WT
HPP Used a block of V-memory in the CPU. The function parameters are V aaa
loaded into the first and second level of the accumulator stack
and the accumulator by three additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent module function.
Step 1: S Load the base number (0-3) into the first byte and the slot number (0-7) into the
second byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: S Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator
stack (maximum of 128 bytes).
Step 3: S Load the intelligent module address which will receive the data into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 4: S Insert the WT instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Vaaa)
where the data will be written from in the CPU.
Helpful Hint: S Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent
and load it into the accumulator when the HEX format is required.
Operand Data Type DL06 Range
aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V See memory map

Discrete Bit Flags Description

SP54 On when RX, WX RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.

NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.

In the following example, when X1 is on, the WT instruction will write six bytes of data to an
intelligent module in base 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module and copy the
data from V-memory locations V1400-V1402.
CPU Intelligent Module
Data

{
Direct SOFT 5 12
V1377 X X X X Address 0

}
X1 The constant value K0102 34 Address 1
LD specifies the base number V1400 3 4 1 2
K0102 (01) and the base slot 56 Address 2
V1401 7 8 5 6
number (02). 78
0 1 9 0 Address 3
V1402
The constant value K6 90 Address 4
LD V1403 X X X X
specifies the number of 01 Address 5
K6 bytes to be written. V1404 X X X X

LD The constant value K0

Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
specifies the starting address
K0
in the intelligent module. $ B ENT
STR 1
V1400 is the starting location L D A B A C
WT SHFT PREV ENT
in the CPU where the specified ANDST 3 0 1 0 2
V1400 data will be written from.
SHFT L D PREV G
ENT
ANDST 3 6
L D A
SHFT PREV ENT
ANDST 3 0
W T B E A A
SHFT ENT
ANDN MLR 1 4 0 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-119
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Network Instructions
Read from Network (RX)
The Read from Network instruction causes the master device on
DS5 Used a network to read a block of data from a slave device on the same
HPP Used RX
network. The function parameters are loaded into the accumulator
A aaa
and the first and second level of the stack. Listed below are the
program steps necessary to execute the Read from Network
function.
Step 1: — Load the slave address (0–90 BCD) into the low byte and “F2” into the high byte
of the accumulator (the next two instructions push this word down to the second layer of the
stack).
Step 2: — Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the accumulator, 2 - 128 bytes are
allowed, (the next instruction pushes this word onto the top of the stack).
Step 3: — Load the starting Master CPU address into the accumulator. This is the memory
location where the data read from the slave will be put. This parameter requires a HEX value.
Step 4: — Insert the RX instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Aaaa)
where the data will be read from in the slave.
Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be used to
convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V All (See page 3–28)
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ P All V-memory. (See page 3–28)
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ CT 0–177
Special Relay ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠SP 0–777
Program Memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ $ 0–2047 (2K program mem.)

5-120 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example, when X1 is on and the port busy relay SP116 (see special relays)
is not on, the RX instruction will access port 2 operating as a master. Ten consecutive bytes
of data (V2000 – V2004) will be read from a CPU at station address 5 and copied into
V-memory locations V2300–V2304 in the CPU with the master port.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT

X1 SP116 LD
KF205

The constant value KF205

Master Slave
specifies the port number (2) CPU CPU
and the slave address (5)

LD
K10
V2277 X X X X X X X X V1777
The constant value K10 V2300 3 4 5 7 3 4 5 7 V2000
specifies the number of
bytes to be read (2-128 V2301 8 5 3 4 8 5 3 4 V2001
bytes allowed) V2302 1 9 3 6 1 9 3 6 V2002

LDA V2303 9 5 7 1 9 5 7 1 V2003

O 2300 V2304 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 V2004
V2305 X X X X X X X X V2005
Octal address 2300 is
converted to 4C0 HEX and
loaded into the accumulator
.
V2300 is the starting
location for the Master CPU
where the specified data will
be read into

RX
V2000

V2000 is the starting

location in the for the Slave
CPU where the specified
data will be read from

HandheldProgrammer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1
W SHFT SP B B G ENT
ANDN STRN 1 1 6

SHFT L D SHFT K SHFT F SHFT C A F ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 5 2 0 5

SHFT L D SHFT K B A ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 1 0

SHFT L D A C D A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 3 0 0

SHFT R X C A A A ENT
ORN SET 2 0 0 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-121
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Write to Network (WX)

The Write to Network instruction is used to write a block
DS5 Used
of data from the master device to a slave device on the
HPP Used WX
same network. The function parameters are loaded into
A aaa
the accumulator and the first and second level of the
stack. Listed below are the program steps necessary to
execute the Write to Network function.
Step 1: — Load the slave address (0–90 BCD) into the low byte and “F2” into the high byte
of the accumulator (the next two instructions push this word down to the second layer of the
stack).
Step 2: — Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the accumulator, 2-128 bytes are
allowed, (the next instruction pushes this word onto the top of the stack).
Step 3: — Load the starting Master CPU address into the accumulator. This is the memory
location where the data will be written from. This parameter requires a HEX value.
Step 4: — Insert the WX instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Aaaa)
where the data will be written to in the slave.

Operand Data Type DL05 Range

⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ A aaa
V-memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V All (See page 3–28)
Pointer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ P All V-memory (See page 3–28)
Inputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X 0–377
Outputs ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Y 0–377
Control Relays ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ C 0–777
Stage ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ S 0–377
Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T 0–177
Counter ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ CT 0–177
Special Relay ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠SP 0–777
Program Memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ $ 0–2048 (2K program mem.)

Helpful Hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be used to
convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.

5-122 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

In the following example when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP116 (see special relays)
is not on, the WX instruction will access port 2 operating as a master. Ten consecutive bytes
of data is read from the Master CPU and copied to V-memory locations V2000–V2004 in the
slave CPU at station address 5.
DirectSOFT
DirectSOFT

X1 SP116 LD
KF205

The constant value KF205

Master Slave
specifies the port number (2) CPU CPU
and the slave address (5)

LD
K10
V2277 X X X X X X X X V1777
The constant value K10 V2300 3 4 5 7 3 4 5 7 V2000
specifies the number of
bytes to be written (2-128 V2301 8 5 3 4 8 5 3 4 V2001
bytes allowed) V2302 1 9 3 6 1 9 3 6 V2002

LDA V2303 9 5 7 1 9 5 7 1 V2003

O 2300 V2304 1 4 2 3 1 4 2 3 V2004
V2305 X X X X X X X X V2005
Octal address 2300 is .
converted to 4C0 HEX and
loaded into the accumulator
V2300 is the starting
location for the Master CPU
where the specified data will
be read from.

WX
V2000

V2000 is the starting

location in the for the Slave
CPU where the specified
data will be written to

HandheldProgrammer Keystrokes

$ B ENT
STR 1
W SHFT SP B C E ENT
ANDN STRN 1 1 6

SHFT L D SHFT K F C A F ENT

SHFT SHFT
ANDST 3 JMP 5 2 0 5

SHFT L D SHFT K B A ENT

ANDST 3 JMP 1 0

SHFT L D A C D A A ENT
ANDST 3 0 2 3 0 0

SHFT W X C A A A ENT
ANDN SET 2 0 0 0

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-123
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions

The Intelligent Box Instructions (commonly referred to as IBox Instructions) listed in this
section are additional, and much different looking, instructions made available with the release
of DirectSOFT programming software. The DL05 PLC requires firmware version v5.10 or
later to use the new DirectSOFT features. For more information on DirectSOFT, please visit
our website at: www.automationdirect.com.
Analog Helper IBoxes
Instruction Ibox # Page
Analog Input / Output Combo Module Pointer Setup (ANLGCMB) IB-462 5-126
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN) IB-460 5-128
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT) IB-461 5-130
Analog Scale 12 Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL) IB-423 5-132
Analog Scale 12 Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB) IB-403 5-134
Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER) IB-422 5-136
Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB) IB-402 5-138
Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL) IB-421 5-140
Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB) IB-401 5-142

Discrete Helper IBoxes

Instruction Ibox # Page
Off Delay Timer (OFFDTMR) IB-302 5-144
On Delay Timer (ONDTMR) IB-301 5-146
One Shot (ONESHOT) IB-303 5-148
Push On / Push Off Circuit (PONOFF) IB-300 5-149

Memory IBoxes
Instruction Ibox # Page
Move Single Word (MOVEW) IB-200 5-150
Move Double Word (MOVED) IB-201 5-151

Math IBoxes
Instruction Ibox # Page
Math - BCD (MATHBCD) IB-521 5-152
Math - Binary (MATHBIN) IB-501 5-154
Square BCD (SQUARE) IB-523 5-156
Square Binary (SQUAREB) IB-503 5-157
Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD) IB-522 5-158
Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN) IB-502 5-159

5-124 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Communication IBoxes
Instruction Ibox # Page
ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) IB-710 5-160
ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD) IB-736 5-162
ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE) IB-735 5-164
ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ) IB-734 5-166
ECOM100 Send E-mail (ECEMAIL) IB-711 5-168
ECOM100 Restore Default E-mail Setup (ECEMRDS) IB-713 5-171
ECOM100 E-mail Setup (ECEMSUP) IB-712 5-174
ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IB-717 5-178
ECOM100 Read Description (ECRDDES) IB-726 5-180
ECOM100 Read Gateway Address (ECRDGWA) IB-730 5-182
ECOM100 Read IP Address (ECRDIP) IB-722 5-184
ECOM100 Read Module ID (ECRDMID) IB-720 5-186
ECOM100 Read Module Name (ECRDNAM) IB-724 5-188
ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask (ECRDSNM) IB-732 5-190
ECOM100 Write Description (ECWRDES) IB-727 5-192
ECOM100 Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA) IB-731 5-194
ECOM100 Write IP Address (ECWRIP) IB-723 5-196
ECOM100 Write Module ID (ECWRMID) IB-721 5-198
ECOM100 Write Name (ECWRNAM) IB-725 5-200
ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM) IB-733 5-202
ECOM100 RX Network Read (ECRX) IB-740 5-204
ECOM100 WX Network Write(ECWX) IB-741 5-207
NETCFG Network Configuration (NETCFG) IB-700 5-210
Network RX Read (NETRX) IB-701 5-212
Network WX Write (NETWX) IB-702 5-215

Counter I/O IBoxes (Work with H0-CTRIO and H0-CTRIO2)

Instruction Ibox # Page
CTRIO Configuration (CTRIO) IB-1000 5-218
CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table (CTRADPT) IB-1005 5-220
CTRIO Clear Preset Table (CTRCLRT) IB-1007 5-223
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (CTREDPT) IB-1003 5-226
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (CTREDRL) IB-1002 5-230
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINPT) IB-1004 5-234
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINTR) IB-1010 5-238
CTRIO Load Profile (CTRLDPR) IB-1001 5-242
CTRIO Read Error (CTRRDER) IB-1014 5-244
CTRIO Run to Limit Mode (CTRRTLM) IB-1011 5-246
CTRIO Run to Position Mode (CTRRTPM) IB-1012 5-249
CTRIO Velocity Mode (CTRVELO) IB-1013 5-251
CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR) IB-1006 5-254

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-125
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup (ANLGCMB) (IB-462)

The Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup instruction generates the logic to
DS5 Used configure the pointer method for an analog input/output combination module on the first PLC
HPP N/A scan following a Program to Run transition.
The ANLGCMB IBox instruction
determines the data format and Pointer
addresses based on the CPU type, the
Base# and the module Slot#.
The Input Data Address is the starting
location in user V-memory where the
analog input data values will be stored,
one location for each input channel
enabled.
The Output Data Address is the starting
location in user V-memory where the
analog output data values will be placed
by ladder code or external device, one location for each output channel enabled.
Since the IBox logic only executes on the first scan, the instruction cannot have any input logic.
ANLGCMB Parameters
• Base # (K0-Local): must be 0 for DL05 PLC
• Slot #: specifies the single PLC option slot that is occupied by the module
• Number of Input Channels: specifies the number of analog input channels to scan
• Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the analog input data format (BCD
or Binary) - the binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels
• Input Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location
that will be used to store the analog input data
• Number of Output Channels: specifies the number of
analog output channels that will be used
• Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the format
of the analog output data (BCD or Binary)
• O
 utput Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to source
the analog output data
Parameter DL05 Range
Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0 (local base only)
Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1
Number of Input Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-8
Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K BCD: K0; Binary: K1
Input Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Number of Output Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-8
Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K BCD: K0; Binary: K1
Output Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-126 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ANLGCMB Example
In the following example, the ANLGCMB instruction is used to setup the pointer method for
an analog I/O combination module that is installed in option slot 2. Four input channels are
enabled and the analog data will be written to V2000 - V2003 in BCD format. Two output
channels are enabled and the analog values will be read from V2100 - V2101 in BCD format.

No permissive contact or input logic is

used with this instruction

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-127
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN) (IB-460)

Analog Input Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to configure the pointer method for
DS5 Used
one analog input module on the first PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.
HPP N/A
This IBox determines the data format and Pointer addresses based on the CPU type, the Base#,
and the Slot#.
The Input Data Address is the starting
location in user V-memory where
the analog input data values will be
stored, one location for each input
channel enabled.
Since this logic only executes on the
first scan, this IBox cannot have any
input logic.

ANLGIN Parameters
• Base # (K0-Local): must be 0 for DL05 PLC
• Slot #: specifies the single PLC option slot that is occupied by the module
• Number of Input Channels: specifies the number of input channels to scan
• I nput Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the analog input data format (BCD
or Binary) - the binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels
• I nput Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location
that will be used to store the analog input data
Parameter DL05 Range
Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0 (local base only)
Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1
Number of Input Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-8
Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K BCD: K0; Binary: K1
Input Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-128 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ANLGIN Example
In the following example, the ANLGIN instruction is used to setup the pointer method for an
analog input module that is installed in option slot 1. Eight input channels are enabled and the
analog data will be written to V2000 - V2007 in BCD format.

No permissive contact or input logic is

used with this instruction

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-129
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT) (IB-461)

Analog Output Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to configure the pointer method for
DS5 Used one analog output module on the first PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.
HPP N/A
This IBox determines the data format and Pointer addresses based on the CPU type, the Base#,
and the Slot#.
The Output Data Address is the starting
location in user V-memory where the
analog output data values will be placed
by ladder code or external device,
one location for each output channel
enabled.
Since this logic only executes on the
first scan, this IBox cannot have any
input logic.

ANLGOUT Parameters
• Base # (K0-Local): must be 0 for DL05 PLC
• Slot #: specifies the single PLC option slot that is occupied by the module
• Number of Output Channels: specifies the number of
analog output channels that will be used
• O
 utput Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the format
of the analog output data (BCD or Binary)
• Output Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location
that will be used to source the analog output data

Parameter DL05 Range

Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0 (local base only)
Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1
Number of Output Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-8
Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K BCD: K0; Binary: K1
Output Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-130 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ANLGOUT Example
In the following example, the ANLGOUT instruction is used to setup the pointer method for
an analog output module that is installed in option slot 3. Two output channels are enabled
and the analog data will be read from V2100 – V2101 in BCD format.

No permissive contact or input logic is

used with this instruction

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-131
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Scale 12 Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL) (IB-423)

Analog Scale 12 Bit BCD to BCD scales a 12 bit BCD analog value (0-4095 BCD) into BCD
DS5 Used engineering units. You specify the engineering unit high value (when raw is 4095), and the
HPP N/A engineering low value (when raw is 0), and the output V memory address you want the to place
the scaled engineering unit value. The engineering units are generated as BCD and can be the
full range of 0 to 9999 (see ANSCLB - Analog Scale 12 Bit Binary to Binary if your raw units
are in Binary format).
Note that this IBox only works with unipolar
unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with
bipolar or sign plus magnitude raw values.

ANSCL Parameters
• Raw (0-4095 BCD): specifies the V-memory location of the
unipolar unsigned raw 0-4095 unscaled value
• High Engineering: specifies the high engineering value when the raw input is 4095
• Low Engineering: specifies the low engineering value when the raw input is 0
• Engineering (BCD): specifies the V-memory location where
the scaled engineering BCD value will be placed
Parameter DL05 Range
Raw (0-4095 BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
High Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-9999
Low Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-9999
Engineering (BCD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-132 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ANSCL Example
In the following example, the ANSCL instruction is used to scale a raw value (0-4095 BCD)
that is in V2000. The engineering scaling range is set 0-100 (low engineering value - high
engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V2100 in BCD format.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-133
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB) (IB-403)

Analog Scale 12-bit Binary to Binary scales a 12-bit binary analog value (0-4095 decimal) into
DS5 Used binary (decimal) engineering units. You specify the engineering unit high value (when raw is
HPP N/A 4095), and the engineering low value (when raw is 0), and the output V-memory address you
want to place the scaled engineering unit value. The engineering units are generated as binary
and can be the full range of 0 to 65535 (see ANSCL - Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD to BCD if
your raw units are in BCD format).
Note that this IBox only works with unipolar
unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with
bipolar, sign plus magnitude, or signed 2’s
complement raw values.

ANSCLB Parameters
• Raw (12-bit binary): specifies the V-memory location of the unipolar
unsigned raw decimal unscaled value (12-bit binary = 0-4095 decimal)
• High Engineering: specifies the high engineering value
when the raw input is 4095 decimal
• Low Engineering: specifies the low engineering value when the raw input is 0 decimal
• Engineering (binary): specifies the V-memory location where
the scaled engineering decimal value will be placed

Parameter DL05 Range

Raw (12 bit binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
High Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-65535
Low Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-65535
Engineering (binary)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-134 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ANSCLB Example
In the following example, the ANSCLB instruction is used to scale a raw value (0-4095 binary)
that is in V2000. The engineering scaling range is set 0-1000 (low engineering value - high
engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V2100 in binary format.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-135
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER) (IB-422)

DS5 Used
Filter Over Time BCD will perform a first-order filter on the Raw Data on a defined time
interval. The equation is:
HPP N/A
New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / FDC] where,
New: New Filtered Value
Old: Old Filtered Value
FDC: Filter Divisor Constant
Raw: Raw Data

The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in the range K1 to K100, such that if it equaled K1
then no filtering would be done.
The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a second
(0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded
in the IBox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power flow controls
whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the first
scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to 0 to give the calculation a
consistent starting point.

FILTER Parameters
• Filter Frequency Timer: specifies the Timer (T) number
which is used by the Filter instruction
• Filter Frequency Time (0.01sec): specifies the rate at which the calculation is performed
• Raw Data (BCD): specifies the V-memory location of the raw unfiltered BCD value
• Filter Divisor (1-100): this constant used to control the filtering effect. A larger value
will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1 results with no filtering.
• Filtered Value (BCD): specifies the V-memory location
where the filtered BCD value will be placed

Parameter DL05 Range

Filter Frequency Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T T0-177
Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-9999
Raw Data (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Filter Divisor (1-100) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-100
Filtered Value (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-136 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

FILTER Example
In the following example, the Filter instruction is used to filter a BCD value that is in V2000.
Timer(T0) is set to 0.5 sec, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed. The filter
constant is set to 2. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1
results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-137
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB) (IB-402)

Filter Over Time in Binary (decimal) will perform a first-order filter on the Raw Data on a
DS5 Used defined time interval. The equation is:
HPP N/A New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / FDC] where
New: New Filtered Value
Old: Old Filtered Value
FDC: Filter Divisor Constant
Raw: Raw Data

The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in the range K1 to K100, such that if it equaled K1
then no filtering would be done.
The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a second
(0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded
in the IBox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power flow controls
whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the first
scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to 0 to give the calculation a
consistent starting point.

FILTERB Parameters
• Filter Frequency Timer: specifies the Timer (T) number
which is used by the Filter instruction
• Filter Frequency Time (0.01sec): specifies the rate at which the calculation is performed
• Raw Data (Binary): specifies the V-memory location of
the raw unfiltered binary (decimal) value
• Filter Divisor (1-100): this constant used to control the filtering effect. A larger value
will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1 results with no filtering.
• Filtered Value (Binary): specifies the V-memory location where
the filtered binary (decimal) value will be placed
Parameter DL05 Range
Filter Frequency Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T T0-177
Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-9999
Raw Data (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Filter Divisor (1-100) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-100
Filtered Value (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-138 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

FILTERB Example
In the following example, the FILTERB instruction is used to filter a binary value that is in
V2000. Timer(T1) is set to 0.5 sec, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed.
The filter constant is set to 3. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A
value of 1 results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100.

SP1

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-139
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL) (IB-421)

Hi/Low Alarm - BCD monitors a BCD value V-memory location and sets four possible alarm
DS5 Used states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the IBox has power flow. You enter
HPP N/A the alarm thresholds as constant K BCD values (K0-K9999) and/or BCD value V-memory
locations.
You must ensure that threshold limits are valid, that
is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when the High-
High or Low-Low alarm condition is true, that the
High and Low alarms will also be set, respectively.
This means you may use the same threshold limit
and same alarm bit for the High-High and the
High alarms in case you only need one “High”
alarm. Also note that the boundary conditions are
inclusive. That is, if the Low boundary is K50,
and the Low-Low boundary is K10, and if the
Monitoring Value equals 10, then the Low Alarm
AND the Low-Low alarm will both be ON. If there
is no power flow to the IBox, then all alarm bits will be turned off regardless of the value of the
Monitoring Value parameter.

HILOAL Parameters
• Monitoring Value (BCD): specifies the V-memory
location of the BCD value to be monitored
• High-High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high-high alarm limit
• High-High Alarm: On when the high-high limit is reached
• High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high alarm limit
• High Alarm: On when the high limit is reached
• Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low alarm limit
• Low Alarm: On when the low limit is reached
• Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low-low alarm limit
• Low-Low Alarm: On when the low-low limit is reached
Parameter DL05 Range
Monitoring Value (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
High-High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
High-High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL05 V-memory map
High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
High Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL05 V-memory map
Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Low Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Low-Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-9999; or see DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Low-Low Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL05 V-memory map

5-140 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

HILOAL Example
In the following example, the HILOAL instruction is used to monitor a BCD value that is in
V2000. If the value in V2000 meets/exceeds the high limit of K900, C101 will turn on. If the
value continues to increase to meet/exceed the high-high limit, C100 will turn on. Both bits
would be on in this case. The high and high-high limits and alarms can be set to the same value
if one “high” limit or alarm is desired to be used.
If the value in V2000 meets or falls below the low limit of K200, C102 will turn on. If the value
continues to decrease to meet or fall below the low-low limit of K100, C103 will turn on. Both
bits would be on in this case. The low and low-low limits and alarms can be set to the same
value if one “low” limit or alarm is desired to be used.

SP1

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-141
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB) (IB-401)

Hi/Low Alarm - Binary monitors a binary (decimal) V-memory location and sets four possible
DS5 Used alarm states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the IBox has power flow. You
HPP N/A enter the alarm thresholds as constant K decimal values (K0-K65535) and/or binary (decimal)
V-memory locations.
You must ensure that threshold limits are valid,
that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when
the High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is
true, that the High and Low alarms will also be
set, respectively. This means you may use the
same threshold limit and same alarm bit for the
High-High and the High alarms in case you
only need one “High” alarm. Also note that the
boundary conditions are inclusive. That is, if
the Low boundary is K50, and the Low-Low
boundary is K10, and if the Monitoring Value
equals 10, then the Low Alarm AND the
Low-Low alarm will both be ON. If there is no
power flow to the IBox, then all alarm bits will be turned off regardless of the value of the
Monitoring Value parameter.
HILOALB Parameters
• Monitoring Value (Binary): specifies the V-memory
location of the Binary value to be monitored
• High-High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high-high alarm limit
• High-High Alarm: On when the high-high limit is reached
• High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high alarm limit
• High Alarm: On when the high limit is reached
• Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low alarm limit
• Low Alarm: On when the low limit is reached
• Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low-low alarm limit
• Low-Low Alarm: On when the low-low limit is reached
Parameter DL05 Range
Monitoring Value (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
High-High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
High-High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL05 V-memory map
High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
High Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL05 V-memory map
Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Low Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Low-Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K K0-65535; or see DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Low-Low Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL05 V-memory map

5-142 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

HILOALB Example
In the following example, the HILOALB instruction is used to monitor a binary value that is
in V2000. If the value in V2000 meets/exceeds the high limit of the binary value in V2011,
C101 will turn on. If the value continues to increase to meet/exceed the high-high limit value
in V2010, C100 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The high and high-high
limits and alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “high” limit or alarm
is desired to be used.
If the value in V2000 meets or falls below the low limit of the binary value in V2012, C102 will
turn on. If the value continues to decrease to meet or fall below the low-low limit in V2013,
C103 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The low and low-low limits and alarms
can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “low” limit or alarm is desired to be
used.

SP1

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-143
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Off Delay Timer (OFFDTMR) (IB-302)

Off Delay Timer will delay the “turning off” of the Output parameter by the specified Off
DS5 Used Delay Time (in hundredths of a second) based on the power flow into the IBox. Once the IBox
HPP N/A receives power, the Output bit will turn on immediately. When the power flow to the IBox
turns off, the Output bit WILL REMAIN
ON for the specified amount of time (in
hundredths of a second). Once the Off Delay
Time has expired, the output will turn Off.
If the power flow to the IBox comes back on
BEFORE the Off Delay Time, then the timer
is RESET and the Output will remain On - so
you must continuously have NO power flow
to the IBox for AT LEAST the specified Off
Delay Time before the Output will turn Off.
This IBox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF), which cannot be used anywhere else in your
program.

OFFDTMR Parameters
• Timer Number: specifies the Timer(TMRF) number
which is used by the OFFDTMR instruction
• Off Delay Time (0.01sec): specifies how long the Output will
remain on once power flow to the Ibox is removed
• Output: specifies the output that will be delayed “turning off” by the Off Delay Time.

Parameter DL05 Range

Timer Number ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T T0-177
Off Delay Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V K0-9999; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL05 V-memory map

5-144 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

OFFDTMR Example
In the following example, the OFFDTMR instruction is used to delay the “turning off”of
output C20. Timer 2 (T2) is set to 5 seconds, the “off-delay” period.
When C100 turns on, C20 turns on and will remain on while C100 is on. When C100 turns
off, C20 will remain for the specified Off Delay Time (5s), and then turn off.

Example timing diagram

C100
5 sec 5 sec

C20

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-145
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

On Delay Timer (ONDTMR) (IB-301)

On Delay Timer will delay the “turning on” of the Output parameter by the specified amount
of time (in hundredths of a second) based on the power flow into the IBox. Once the IBox
DS5 Used loses power, the Output is turned off immediately. If the power flow turns off BEFORE the
HPP N/A On Delay Time, then the timer is RESET and the Output is never turned on, so you must
have continuous power flow to the IBox for at least the specified On Delay Time before the
Output turns On.
This IBox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF),
which cannot be used anywhere else in your
program.

ONDTMR Parameters
• Timer Number: specifies the Timer(TMRF) number
which is used by the ONDTMR instruction
• On Delay Time (0.01sec): specifies how long the Output will
remain on once power flow to the Ibox is removed
• Output: specifies the output that will be delayed “turning on” by the On Delay Time.

Parameter DL05 Range

Timer Number ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T T0-177
On Delay Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V K0-9999; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B See DL05 V-memory map

5-146 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ONDTMR Example
In the following example, the ONDTMR instruction is used to delay the “turning on” of
output C21. Timer 1 (T1) is set to 2 seconds, the “on-delay” period.
When C101 turns on, C21 is delayed turning on by 2 seconds. When C101 turns off, C21
turns off immediately.

Example timing diagram

C101
2 sec 2 sec

C21

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-147
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

One Shot (ONESHOT) (IB-303)

One Shot will turn on the given bit output parameter for one scan on an OFF to ON transition
DS5 Used of the power flow into the IBox. This IBox is simply a different name for the PD Coil (Positive
HPP N/A Differential).

ONESHOT Parameters
• Discrete Output: specifies the output
that will be on for one scan

Parameter DL05 Range

Discrete Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C See DL05 V-memory map

ONESHOT Example
In the following example, the ONESHOT instruction is used to turn C100 on for one PLC
scan after C0 goes from an off to on transition. The input logic must produce an off to on
transition to execute the One Shot instruction.

Example timing diagram

C0

Scan time

C100

5-148 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Push On / Push Off Circuit (PONOFF) (IB-300)

Push On/Push Off Circuit toggles an output state whenever its input power flow transitions
DS5 Used from off to on. Requires an extra bit parameter for scan-to-scan state information. This extra
HPP N/A bit must NOT be used anywhere else in the program. This is also known as a “flip-flop circuit”.

PONOFF Parameters
• Discrete Input: specifies the input
that will toggle the specified output
• Discrete Output: specifies the output
that will be “turned on/off” or toggled
• Internal State: specifies a work bit
that is used by the instruction

Parameter DL05 Range

Discrete Input ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,SP,B,PB See DL05 V-memory map
Discrete Output ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Internal State⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C See DL05 V-memory map

PONOFF Example
In the following example, the PONOFF instruction is used to control the on and off states of
the output C20 with a single input C10. When C10 is pressed once, C20 turns on. When C10
is pressed again, C20 turns off. C100 is an internal bit used by the instruction.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-149
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Move Single Word (MOVEW) (IB-200)

Move Single Word moves (copies) a word to a memory location directly or indirectly via a
DS5 Used pointer, either as a HEX constant, from a memory location, or indirectly through a pointer.
HPP N/A

MOVEW Parameters
• From WORD: specifies the word that
will be moved to another location
• To WORD: specifies the location where
the “From WORD” will be move to

Parameter DL05 Range

From WORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-FFFF; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
To WORD⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

MOVEW Example
In the following example, the MOVEW instruction is used to move 16-bits of data from
V2000 to V3000 when C100 turns on.

5-150 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Move Double Word (MOVED) (IB-201)

Move Double Word moves (copies) a double word to two consecutive memory locations
DS5 Used directly or indirectly via a pointer, either as a double HEX constant, from a double memory
HPP N/A location, or indirectly through a pointer to a double memory location.

MOVED Parameters
• From DWORD: specifies the double
word that will be moved to another
location
• To DWORD: specifies the location
where the “From DWORD” will be
moved to.
Parameter DL05 Range
From DWORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-FFFFFFFF; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
To DWORD⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

MOVED Example
In the following example, the MOVED instruction is used to move 32-bits of data from V2000
and V2001 to V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-151
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Math - BCD (MATHBCD) (IB-521)

Math - BCD Format lets you enter complex
mathematical expressions like you would in Visual
DS5 Used
Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations,
HPP N/A
nesting parentheses up to 4 levels deep. In addition to
+ - * /, you can do Modulo (% aka Remainder), Bit-
wise And (&) Or (|) Xor (^), and some BCD functions
- Convert to BCD (BCD), Convert to Binary (BIN),
BCD Complement (BCDCPL), Convert from Gray
Code (GRAY), Invert Bits (INV), and BCD/HEX to
Seven Segment Display (SEG).
Example: ((V2000 + V2001) / (V2003 - K100)) * GRAY(V3000 & K001F)
Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single word BCD formatted value. Intermediate
results can go up to 32-bit values, but as long as the final result fits in a 16-bit BCD word, the
calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V2000 *
K1000) / K4095. The multiply term most likely will exceed 9999 but fits within 32 bits. The
divide operation will divide 4095 into the 32-bit accumulator, yielding a result that will always
fit in 16 bits.
You can reference binary V-memory values by using the BCD conversion function on a
V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is BCD(V2000) is okay and will convert
V2000 from Binary to BCD, but BCD(V2000 + V3000) will add V2000 as BCD, to V3000
as BCD, then interpret the result as Binary and convert it to BCD - NOT GOOD.
Also, the final result is a 16-bit BCD number and so you could do BIN around the entire
operation to store the result as Binary.

MATHBCD Parameters
• WORD Result: specifies the location where the BCD result of the mathematical
expression will be placed (result must fit into 16 bit single V-memory location)
• Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored
in specified WORD Result. Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in
BCD format.

Parameter DL05 Range

WORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Expression⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text

5-152 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

MATHBCD Example
In the following example, the MATHBCD instruction is used to calculate the math expression
which multiplies the BCD value in V1200 by 1000 then divides by 4095 and loads the resulting
value in V2000.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-153
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Math - Binary (MATHBIN) (IB-501)

Math - Binary Format lets you enter complex
DS5 Used
mathematical expressions like you would in Visual
HPP N/A Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations, nesting
parentheses up to 4 levels deep. In addition to + - * /,
you can do Modulo (% aka Remainder), Shift Right (>>)
and Shift Left (<<), Bit-wise And (&) Or (|) Xor (^),
and some binary functions - Convert to BCD (BCD),
Convert to Binary (BIN), Decode Bits (DECO), Encode
Bits (ENCO), Invert Bits (INV), HEX to Seven Segment
Display (SEG), and Sum Bits (SUM).
Example: ((V2000 + V2001) / (V2003 - K10)) * SUM(V3000 & K001F)
Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single word binary formatted value. Intermediate
results can go up to 32-bit values, but as long as the final result fits in a 16 bit binary word,
the calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V2000
* K1000) / K4095. The multiply term most likely will exceed 65535 but fits within 32 bits.
The divide operation will divide 4095 into the 32-bit accumulator, yielding a result that will
always fit in 16 bits.
You can reference BCD V-memory values by using the BIN conversion function on a
V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is, BIN(V2000) is okay and will convert
V2000 from BCD to Binary, but BIN(V2000 + V3000) will add V2000 as Binary, to V3000
as Binary, then interpret the result as BCD and convert it to Binary - NOT GOOD.
Also, the final result is a 16-bit binary number and so you could do BCD around the entire
operation to store the result as BCD.

MATHBIN Parameters
• WORD Result: specifies the location where the binary result of the mathematical
expression will be placed (result must fit into 16-bit single V-memory location)
• Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored
in specified WORD Result. Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in
binary format.

Parameter DL05 Range

WORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Expression⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text

5-154 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

MATHBIN Example
In the following example, the MATHBIN instruction is used to calculate the math expression
which multiplies the Binary value in V1200 by 1000 then divides by 4095 and loads the
resulting value in V2000.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-155
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Square BCD (SQUARE) (IB-523)

Square BCD squares the given 4-digit WORD BCD number and writes it in as an 8-digit
DS5 Used DWORD BCD result.
HPP N/A

SQUARE Parameters
• V
 alue (WORD BCD): specifies the BCD
Word or constant that will be squared
• R
 esult (DWORD BCD): specifies the
location where the squared DWORD
BCD value will be placed
Parameter DL05 Range
Value (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-9999 ; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD BCD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

SQUARE Example
In the following example, the SQUARE instruction is used to square the 4-digit BCD value in
V2000 and store the 8-digit double word BCD result in V3000 and V3001

5-156 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Square Binary (SQUAREB) (IB-503)

Square Binary squares the given 16-bit WORD Binary number and writes it as a 32-bit
DS5 Used DWORD Binary result.
HPP N/A

SQUAREB Parameters
• Value (WORD Binary): specifies the
binary Word or constant that will be
squared
• Result (DWORD Binary): specifies the
location where the squared DWORD
binary value will be placed

Parameter DL05 Range

Value (WORD Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K K0-65535; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD Binary)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

SQUAREB Example
In the following example, the SQUAREB instruction is used to square the single word Binary
value in V2000 and store the 8-digit double word Binary result in V3000 and V3001.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-157
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD) (IB-522)

Sum BCD Numbers sums up a list of consecutive 4-digit WORD BCD numbers into an
DS5 Used
8-digit DWORD BCD result.
HPP N/A
You specify the group’s starting and ending
V- memory addresses (inclusive). When
enabled, this instruction will add up all the
numbers in the group (so you may want
to place a differential contact driving the
enable).
SUMBCD could be used as the first part of
calculating an average.

SUMBCD Parameters
• Start Address: specifies the starting address of a block of V-memory location values to be
added together (BCD)
• End Addr (inclusive): specifies the ending address of a block of V-memory location values
to be added together (BCD)
• Result (DWORD BCD): specifies the location where the sum of the block of V-memory
BCD values will be placed.

Parameter DL05 Range

Start Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
End Address (inclusive) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD BCD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

SUMBCD Example
In the following example, the SUMBCD instruction is used to total the sum of all BCD values
in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 8-digit double word BCD value in V3000
and V3001.

5-158 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN) (IB-502)

Sum Binary Numbers sums up a list of consecutive 16-bit WORD Binary numbers into a
DS5 Used
32-bit DWORD binary result.
HPP N/A
You specify the group’s starting and ending
V- memory addresses (inclusive). When
enabled, this instruction will add up all the
numbers in the group (so you may want
to place a differential contact driving the
enable).
SUMBIN could be used as the first part of
calculating an average.

SUMBIN Parameters
• Start Address: specifies the starting address of a block of V-memory location values to be
added together (Binary)
• End Addr (inclusive): specifies the ending address of a block of V-memory location values
to be added together (Binary)
• Result (DWORD Binary): specifies the location where the sum of the block of V-memory
binary values will be placed
Parameter DL05 Range
Start Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
End Address (inclusive) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Result (DWORD Binary)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

SUMBIN Example
In the following example, the SUMBIN instruction is used to total the sum of all Binary values
in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 8-digit double word Binary value in V3000
and V3001.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-159
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) (IB-710)

DS5 Used
ECOM100 Configuration defines all the common information for one specific ECOM100
module which is used by the other ECOM100 IBoxes; for example, ECRX - ECOM100
HPP N/A
Network Read , ECEMAIL - ECOM100 Send EMail, ECIPSUP - ECOM100 IP Setup, etc.
You MUST have the ECOM100
Configuration IBox at the top of your ladder/
stage program with any other configuration
IBoxes. The Message Buffer parameter
specifies the starting address of a 65 WORD
buffer. This is 101 Octal addresses (e.g.
V1400 thru V1500).
If you have more than one ECOM100 in your
PLC, you must have a different ECOM100
Configuration IBox for EACH ECOM100
module in your system that utilizes any ECOM IBox instructions.
The Workspace and Status parameters and the entire Message Buffer are internal, private
registers used by the ECOM100 Configuration IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE in this one
instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
In order for MOST ECOM100 IBoxes to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board. You can keep dip switch 7 off if you are ONLY using ECOM100
Network Read and Write IBoxes (ECRX, ECWX).

ECOM100 Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in
the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module
must reference this logical number
• Slot: specifies the option slot the module occupies
• Status: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• M
 sg Buffer: specifies the starting address of a 65 word buffer that will be used by the
module for configuration

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-4
Status ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Msg Buffer (65 words used)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-160 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Example
The ECOM100 Config IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other ECOM100 based
IBoxes (ECxxxx). You must have an ECOM100 Config IBox for each ECOM100 module in
your system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every
scan.
This IBox defines ECOM100# K0 to be in slot 3. Any ECOM100 IBoxes that need to reference
this specific module (such as ECEMAIL, ECRX, ...) would enter K0 for their ECOM100#
parameter.
The Status register is for reporting any completion or error information to other ECOM100
IBoxes. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the ECOM100, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other ECOM100 IBoxes in the program. This
V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
The Message Buffer of 65 words (130 bytes) is a common pool of memory that is used by other
ECOM100 IBoxes (such as ECEMAIL). This way, you can have a bunch of ECEMAIL IBoxes,
but only need 1 common buffer for generating and sending each EMail. These V-memory
registers must not be used anywhere else in your entire program.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-161
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD) (IB-736)

ECOM100 Disable DHCP will setup the ECOM100 to use its internal TCP/IP settings
DS5 Used
on a leading edge transition to the IBox. To configure the ECOM100’s TCP/IP settings
HPP N/A manually, use the NetEdit3 utility, or you can
do it programmatically from your PLC program
using the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP), or the
individual ECOM100 IBoxes: ECOM Write IP
Address (ECWRIP), ECOM Write Gateway Address
(ECWRGWA), and ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask
(ECWRSNM).
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The “Disable DHCP” setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of
this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-
ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE,
on second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED
SP0 (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECDHCPD Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in
the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module
must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-162 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECDHCPD Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, disable DHCP in the ECOM100. DHCP is the same protocol used
by PCs for using a DHCP Server to automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address, Gateway
Address, and Subnet Mask. Typically disabling DHCP is done by assigning a hard-coded
IP Address either in NetEdit or using one of the ECOM100 IP Setup IBoxes, but this IBox
allows you to disable DHCP in the ECOM100 using your ladder program. The ECDHCPD
is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command
to disable DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes
from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you
can look at V2000 for the specific error code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-163
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE) (IB-735)

ECOM100 Enable DHCP will tell the ECOM100 to obtain its TCP/IP setup from a DHCP
DS5 Used
Server on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
HPP N/A The IBox will be successful once the ECOM100
has received its TCP/IP settings from the DHCP
server. Since it is possible for the DHCP server to be
unavailable, a Timeout parameter is provided so the
IBox can complete, but with an Error (Error Code =
1004 decimal).
See also the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox
717 to directly setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters
in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The “Enable DHCP” setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of
this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-
ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE,
on second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED
SP0 (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECDHCPE Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Timeout(sec): specifies a timeout period so that the
instruction may have time to complete
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
Parameter DL05 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Timeout (sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K5-127
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-164 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECDHCPE Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, enable DHCP in the ECOM100. DHCP is the same protocol
used by PCs for using a DHCP Server to automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address,
Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. Typically this is done using NetEdit, but this IBox
allows you to enable DHCP in the ECOM100 using your ladder program. The ECDHCPE is
leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The commands
to enable DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes
from OFF to ON. The ECDHCPE does more than just set the bit to enable DHCP in the
ECOM100, but it then polls the ECOM100 once every second to see if the ECOM100 has
found a DHCP server and has a valid IP Address. Therefore, a timeout parameter is needed in
case the ECOM100 cannot find a DHCP server. If a timeout does occur, the Error bit will turn
on and the error code will be 1005 decimal. The Success bit will turn on only if the ECOM100
finds a DHCP Server and is assigned a valid IP Address. If successful, turn on C100. If there is
a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-165
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ) (IB-734)

ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting will determine if DHCP is enabled in the ECOM100 on a
DS5 Used leading edge transition to the IBox. The DHCP Enabled bit parameter will be ON if DHCP
HPP N/A is enabled, OFF if disabled.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST
NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will
turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function,
you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECDHCPQ Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• DHCP Enabled: specifies a bit that will turn on if the ECOM100’s DHCP is enabled or
remain off if disabled - after instruction query, be sure to check the state of the Success/
Error bit state along with DHCP Enabled bit state to confirm a successful module query

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
DHCP Enabled⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

5-166 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECDHCPQ Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read whether DHCP is enabled or disabled in the ECOM100
and store it in C5. DHCP is the same protocol used by PCs for using a DHCP Server to
automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address, Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. The
ECDHCPQ is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to read (Query) whether DHCP is enabled or not will be sent to the ECOM100
whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If
there is a failure, turn on C101.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-167
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Send E-mail (ECEMAIL) (IB-711)

ECOM100 Send EMail, on a leading edge transition, will behave as an EMail client and send
DS5 Used an SMTP request to your SMTP Server to send the EMail message to the EMail addresses in
HPP N/A the To: field and also to those listed in the Cc: list hard coded in the ECOM100. It will send
the SMTP request based on the specified ECOM100#, which corresponds to a specific unique
ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) at the top of
your program.
The Body: field supports what the PRINT and VPRINT
instructions support for text and embedded variables,
allowing you to embed real-time data in your EMail (e.g.
“V2000 = “ V2000:B).
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register
used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE in this one
instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in
your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the request is complete. If there is an
error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), an SMPT
protocol error (between 100 and 999), or a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
Since the ECOM100 is only an EMail Client and requires access to an SMTP Server, you
MUST have the SMTP parameters configured properly in the ECOM100 via the ECOM100’s
Home Page and/or the EMail Setup instruction (ECEMSUP). To get to the ECOM100’s
Home Page, use your favorite Internet browser and browse to the ECOM100’s IP Address, e.g.
http://192.168.12.86
You are limited to approximately 100 characters of message data for the entire instruction,
including the To: Subject: and Body: fields. To save space, the ECOM100 supports a hard
coded list of EMail addresses for the Carbon Copy field (cc:) so that you can configure those
IN the ECOM100, and keep the To: field small (or even empty), to leave more room for the
Subject: and Body: fields.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECEMAIL Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• To: specifies an E-mail address that the message will be sent to
• Subject: subject of the e-mail message
• Body: supports what the PRINT and VPRINT instructions support for text and
embedded variables, allowing you to embed real-time data in the EMail message

5-168 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map
To:⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text
Subject:⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text
Body:⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ See PRINT and VPRINT instructions

ECEMAIL Decimal Status Codes

This list of status codes is based on the list in the ECOM100 Mock Slave Address 89 Command
Specification.
ECOM100 Status codes can be classified into four different areas based on its decimal value:
ECOM100 Status Codes Areas
0-1 Normal Status - no error
2-99 Internal ECOM100 errors
100-999 Standard TCP/IP protocol errors (SMTP, HTTP, etc.)
1000+ IBox ladder logic assigned errors (SP Slot Error, etc.)

For the ECOM100 Send EMail IBox, the status codes below are specific to this IBox:
Normal Status 0 - 1
ECOM100 Send EMAIL IBOX Status Codes
0-1 Success - ECEMAIL completed successfully
1 Busy - ECEMAIL IBoxlogic sets the Error register to this
value when the ECEMAIL starts a new request

Internal ECOM100 Errors (2-99)

Internal ECOM100 100 Errors (2-99)
Timeout Errors- last digit shows where in ECOM100’s SMTP state logic the timeout
10-19 occured; regardless of the last digit, the SMTP conversation with the SMTPServer
timed out
SMTP Internal Errors (20-29)
20 TCP Write Error
21 No Sendee
22 Invalid State
23 Invalid Data
24 Invalid SMTP Configuration
25 Memory Allocation Error

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-169
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECEMAIL IBox Ladder Logic Assigned Errors (1000+)

Internal ECOM100 100 Errors (2-99)
SP SLot Error - The SP error bit for the ECOM100’s slot turned on. Possibly using RX or
10-19 WX instructions on the ECOM100 and walking on the ECEMAIL execution. User should
use ECRX and ECWX IBoxes.

ECEMAIL IBox Ladder Logic Assigned Errors (1000+)

SMTP Protocol Errors - SMTP (100-999)

1xx Informational replies
2xx Success replies
200 (Non-standard success response.)
211 System Status, or system help reply
214 Help message
220 <domain> Service ready - Ready to start TLS
221 <domain> Service closing transmission channel
*250 OK, queuing for node <node> started
Requested mail action okay, completed
251 OK, no messages waiting for node <node>
User not local will to <forward-path>
252 OK, pending messages for node <node> started
Cannot VRFY (e.g. info is not local), but will take message for this user and attempt delivery
253 OK, message pending messages for node <node> started
3xx (re)direction replies
354 Start mail input; end with <CRLF> <CRLF>
355 Octet-offset is the transaction offset
4xx Client / request error replies
421 <domain> Service not available, closing transmission channel
432 A password transition is needed
450 Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable
ATRN request refused
451 Requested action aborted: local error in processing
Unable to process ATRN request now
452 Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
453 You have no mail
454 TLS not available due to temporary reason -
Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
458 Unable to queue messages for node <node>
459 Node <node> not allowed: <reason>
5xx Server / process error replies
500 Syntax error, command unrecognized Syntax error
501 Syntax error in parameter or arguments
502 Command not implemented
NOTE: *250 is success in SMTP. ECOM100 reports this as a status code of 0, success.

Continued on next page

5-170 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

SMTP Protocol Errors - SMTP (100-999) cont’d

503 Bad sequence of commands
504 Command parameter not implemented
521 <domain> Does not accept mail
530 Access denied - Must issue a STARTTLS command first”
Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
534 Authentication mechanism too weak
538 Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism
550 Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable
551 User not local; please try <forward path>
552 Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation
553 Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed
554 Transaction failed

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-171
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECEMAIL Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: When a machine goes down, send an email to Joe in maintenance and to the VP over
production showing what machine is down along with the date/time stamp of when it went
down.
The ECEMAIL is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). An email will be sent whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. This
helps prevent self inflicted spamming.
If the EMail is sent, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look
at V2000 for the SMTP error code or other possible error codes.

5-172 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Restore Default E-mail Setup (ECEMRDS) (IB-713)

ECOM100 Restore Default EMail Setup, on a leading edge transition, will restore the original
DS5 Used EMail Setup data stored in the ECOM100 back to the working copy based on the specified
HPP N/A ECOM100#, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100)
at the top of your program.
When the ECOM100 is first powered up, it copies
the EMail setup data stored in ROM to the working
copy in RAM. You can then modify this working
copy from your program using the ECOM100
EMail Setup (ECEMSUP) IBox. After modifying
the working copy, you can later restore the original
setup data via your program by using this IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECEMRDS Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
Parameter DL05 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-173
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECEMRDS Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that president of the company gets copies of all
EMails being sent.
The ECOM100 EMail Setup IBox allows you to set/change the SMTP EMail settings stored
in the ECOM100.

5-174 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECEMRDS Example
Rung 3: Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the default
EMail setup in the ECOM100.
The ECEMRDS is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The ROM based EMail configuration stored in the ECOM100 will be copied over the
“working copy” whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON (the working
copy can be changed by using the ECEMSUP IBox).
If successful, turn on C102. If there is a failure, turn on C103. If it fails, you can look at V2001
for the specific error code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-175
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 E-mail Setup (ECEMSUP) (IB-712)

ECOM100 EMail Setup, on a leading edge transition, will modify the working copy of the
DS5 Used EMail setup currently in the ECOM100 based on the specified ECOM100#, which corresponds
HPP N/A to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) at the top of your program.
You may pick and choose any or all fields to be
modified using this instruction. Note that these
changes are cumulative: if you execute multiple
ECOM100 EMail Setup IBoxes, then all of the
changes are made in the order they are executed. Also
note that you can restore the original ECOM100
EMail Setup that is stored in the ECOM100 to
the working copy by using the ECOM100 Restore
Default EMail Setup (ECEMRDS) IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
You are limited to approximately 100 characters/bytes of setup data for the entire instruction.
So if needed, you could divide the entire setup across multiple ECEMSUP IBoxes on a field-
by-field basis, for example do the Carbon Copy (cc:) field in one ECEMSUP IBox and the
remaining setup parameters in another.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECEMSUP Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• SMTP Server IP Addr: optional parameter that specifies the IP
Address of the SMTP Server on the ECOM100’s network
• Sender Name: optional parameter that specifies the sender name that
will appear in the “From:” field to those who receive the e-mail
• Sender EMail: optional parameter that specifies the sender EMail address
that will appear in the “From:” field to those who receive the e-mail

5-176 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECEMSUP Parameters
• P
 ort Number: optional parameter that specifies the TCP/IP Port Number to send SMTP
requests; usually this does not to be configured (see your network administrator for
information on this setting)
• T
 imeout (sec): optional parameter that specifies the number of seconds to wait for the
SMTP Server to send the EMail to all the recipients
• C
 c: optional parameter that specifies a list of “carbon copy” Email addresses to send all
EMails to.
Parameter DL05 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-177
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECEMSUP Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

5-178 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECEMSUP Example
Rung 2: Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that president of the company gets copies
of all EMails being sent.The ECOM100 EMail Setup IBox allows you to set/change the
SMTP EMail settings stored in the ECOM100. The ECEMSUP is leading edge triggered,
not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). At power-up, the ROM based EMail
configuration stored in the ECOM100 is copied to a RAM based “working copy”. You can
change this working copy by using the ECEMSUP IBox. To restore the original ROM based
configuration, use the Restore Default EMail Setup ECEMRDS IBox.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000

for the specific error code.

Rung 3: Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the default
EMail setup in the ECOM100.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-179
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) (IB-717)

ECOM100 IP Setup will configure the three TCP/IP parameters in the ECOM100: IP
DS5 Used
Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address, on a leading edge transition to the IBox. The
HPP N/A ECOM100 is specified by the ECOM100#, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100
Configuration (ECOM100) IBox at the top of your
program.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register
used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE in this one
instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in
your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on
once the command is complete. If there is an error, the
Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error
code (less than 100), or a PLC logic error (greater than
1000).
This setup data is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and will disable the ECOM100
module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY
RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on second scan. Since it requires
a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (NOT First Scan) to drive
the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECIPSUP Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• IP Address: specifies the module’s IP Address
• Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask for the module to use
• Gateway Address: specifies the Gateway Address for the module to use
Parameter DL05 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
IP Address⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠IP Address 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
Subnet Mask Address⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠IP Address Mask 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
Gateway Address⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠IP Address 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254

5-180 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECIPSUP Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, configure all of the TCP/IP parameters in the ECOM100:
IP Address: 192.168. 12.100
Subnet Mask: 255.255. 0. 0
Gateway Address: 192.168. 0. 1
The ECIPSUP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to write the TCP/IP configuration parameters will be sent to the ECOM100
whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000
for the specific error code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-181
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Read Description (ECRDDES) (IB-726)

ECOM100 Read Description will read the ECOM100’s Description field up to the number
DS5 Used
of specified characters on a leading edge transition
HPP N/A to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn
on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you
must turn ON dip switch 7 on the ECOM100
circuit board.

ECRDDES Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in
the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module
must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Description: specifies the starting buffer location where the ECOM100’s Module Name
will be placed
• N
 um Char: specifies the number of characters (bytes) to read from the ECOM100’s
Description field

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Description ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Num Chars⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128

5-182 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECRDDES Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Module Description of the ECOM100 and store it in
V3000 thru V3007 (16 characters). This text can be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDDES is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module description will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever
the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-183
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Read Gateway Address (ECRDGWA) (IB-730)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Read Gateway Address will read the 4 parts of the Gateway IP address and store
HPP N/A them in 4 consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to
the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal,
private register used by this IBox and MUST
BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and
MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will
turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to
function, you must turn ON dip switch 7
on the ECOM100 circuit board.

ECRDGWA Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Gateway IP Addr: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s
Gateway Address will be placed in 4 consecutive V-memory locations

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Gateway IP Address (4 Words)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-184 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECRDGWA Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Gateway Address of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000
thru V3003 (4 decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s Gateway Address could be displayed by
an HMI.
The ECRDGWA is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the Gateway Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-185
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Read IP Address (ECRDIP) (IB-722)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Read IP Address will read the 4 parts of the IP address and store them in 4
HPP N/A consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal,
private register used by this IBox and
MUST BE UNIQUE in this one
instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter
will turn on once the command is
complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to
function, you must turn ON dip switch 7
on the ECOM100 circuit board.

ECRDIP Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• IP Address: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s IP
Address will be placed in 4 consecutive V-memory locations

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
IP Address (4 Words)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-186 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECRDIP Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the IP Address of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000 thru
V3003 (4 decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s IP Address could be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDIP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to read the IP Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow
into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-187
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Read Module ID (ECRDMID) (IB-720)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Read Module ID will read the binary (decimal) WORD sized Module ID on a
HPP N/A leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal,
private register used by this IBox and MUST
BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and
MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will
turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to
function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on
the ECOM100 circuit board.

ECRDMID Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Module ID: specifies the location where the ECOM100’s
Module ID (decimal) will be placed
Parameter DL05 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Module ID⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-188 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECRDMID Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Module ID of the ECOM100 and store it in V2000.
The ECRDMID is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module ID will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power
flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-189
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Read Module Name (ECRDNAM) (IB-724)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Read Name will read the Module Name up to the number of specified characters
HPP N/A on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on
once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you
must turn ON dip switch 7 on the ECOM100
circuit board.

ECRDNAM Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• M
 odule Name: specifies the starting buffer location where
the ECOM100’s Module Name will be placed
• Num Chars: specifies the number of characters (bytes)
to read from the ECOM100’s Name field

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Module Name ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Num Chars⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128

5-190 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECRDNAM Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Module Name of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000 thru
V3003 (8 characters). This text can be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDNAM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module name will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-191
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask (ECRDSNM) (IB-732)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask will read the 4 parts of the Subnet Mask and store them in 4
HPP N/A consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal,
private register used by this IBox and MUST
BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and
MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter
will turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to
function, you must turn ON dip switch 7
on the ECOM100 circuit board.

ECRDSNM Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Subnet Mask: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s
Subnet Mask will be placed in 4 consecutive V-memory locations

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Subnet Mask (4 Words)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-192 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECRDSNM Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Subnet Mask of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000 thru
V3003 (4 decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s Subnet Mask could be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDSNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the Subnet Mask will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-193
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Write Description (ECWRDES) (IB-727)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Write Description will write the given Description to the ECOM100 module on
HPP N/A a leading edge transition to the IBox. If you use a dollar sign ($) or double quote (“), use the
PRINT/VPRINT escape sequence of TWO dollar signs ($$) for a single dollar sign or dollar
sign-double quote ($”) for a double quote character.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn
on once the command is complete. If there is an
error, the Error Code parameter will report an
ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or a PLC
logic error (greater than 1000).
The Description is stored in Flash-ROM in the
ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half
second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you
only execute this IBox ONCE on second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute,
use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECWRDES Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• Description: specifies the Description that will be written to the module

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Description ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text

5-194 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECWRDES Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, set the Module Description of the ECOM100. Typically this is done
using NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module description in the ECOM100
using your ladder program.
The EWRDES is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to write the module description will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000
for the specific error code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-195
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA) (IB-731)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Write Gateway Address will write the given Gateway IP Address to the ECOM100
HPP N/A module on a leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox
717 to setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters
in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Gateway Address.
The Workspace parameter is an internal,
private register used by this IBox and MUST
BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and
MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will
turn on once the command is complete. If
there is an error, the Error Code parameter
will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The Gateway Address is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE, on
second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
(STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECWRGWA Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• Gateway Address: specifies the Gateway IP Address that will be written to the module

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Gateway Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254

5-196 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECWRGWA Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, assign the Gateway Address of the ECOM100 to 192.168.0.1
The ECWRGWA is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the Gateway Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000
for the specific error code.
To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP
Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-197
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Write IP Address (ECWRIP) (IB-723)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Write IP Address will write the given IP Address to the ECOM100 module on
HPP N/A a leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox 717 to
setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters in a single
instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST
NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will
turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report
an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or a
PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The IP Address is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on
second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
(STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECWRIP Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• IP Address: specifies the IP Address that will be written to the module

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
IP Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ 0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254

5-198 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECWRIP Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, assign the IP Address of the ECOM100 to 192.168.12.100
The ECWRIP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to write the IP Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow
into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000
for the specific error code.
To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP
Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-199
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Write Module ID (ECWRMID) (IB-721)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Write Module ID will write the given Module ID on a leading edge transition to
HPP N/A the IBox
If the Module ID is set in the hardware using the
dipswitches, this IBox will fail and return error code
1005 (decimal).
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on
once the command is complete. If there is an error,
the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100
error code (less than 100), or a PLC logic error
(greater than 1000).
The Module ID is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on
second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
(STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECWRMID Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• Module ID: specifies the Module ID that will be written to the module

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Module ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K0-65535

5-200 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECWRMID Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, set the Module ID of the ECOM100. Typically this is done using
NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module ID of the ECOM100 using your
ladder program.
The EWRMID is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the module ID will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power
flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000
for the specific error code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-201
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Write Name (ECWRNAM) (IB-725)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Write Name will write the given Name to the ECOM100 module on a leading
HPP N/A edge transition to the IBox. If you use a dollar sign ($) or double quote (“), use the PRINT/
VPRINT escape sequence of TWO dollar signs ($$) for a single dollar sign or dollar sign-
double quote ($”) for a double quote character.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on
once the command is complete. If there is an error,
the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100
error code (less than 100), or a PLC logic error
(greater than 1000).
The Name is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100
and the execution of this IBox will disable the
ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is
HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on second scan. Since
it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT First
Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECWRNAM Parameters
• E
 COM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in
the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module
must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• Module Name: specifies the Name that will be written to the module

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Module Name ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Text

5-202 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECWRNAM Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, set the Module Name of the ECOM100. Typically this is done using
NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module name of the ECOM100 using your
ladder program.
The EWRNAM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the module name will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000
for the specific error code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-203
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM) (IB-733)

DS5 Used ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask will write the given Subnet Mask to the ECOM100 module
HPP N/A on a leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox 717
to setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn
on once the command is complete. If there is an
error, the Error Code parameter will report an
ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or a PLC
logic error (greater than 1000).
The Subnet Mask is stored in Flash-ROM in the
ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half
second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you
only execute this IBox ONCE on second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute,
use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.

ECWRSNM Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask that will be written to the module

Parameter DL05 Range

ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Subnet Mask ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ Masked IP Address

5-204 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECWRSNM Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, assign the Subnet Mask of the ECOM100 to 255.255.0.0
The ECWRSNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the Subnet Mask will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000
for the specific error code.
To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP
Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-205
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 RX Network Read (ECRX) (IB-740)
ECOM100 RX Network Read performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with
DS5 Used all other ECOM100 RX (ECRX) and ECOM100 WX (ECWX) IBoxes in your program to
HPP N/A simplify communications networking. It will perform the RX on the specified ECOM100#’s
network, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) IBox
at the top of your program.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST
NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will read
element data from the specified slave into the
given destination V-memory buffer, giving other
ECOM100 RX and ECOM100 WX IBoxes on
that ECOM100# network a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from 5 different slaves, you can
have all of these ECRX and ECWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always On).
They will execute round-robin style, automatically.

ECRX Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Slave ID: specifies the slave ECOM(100) PLC that
will be targeted by the ECRX instruction
• From Slave Element (Src): specifies the slave address of the data to be read
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to read from the slave ECOM(100) PLC
• To Master Element (Dest): specifies the location where the slave
data will be placed in the master ECOM100 PLC
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
Parameter DL05 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-90
From Slave Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V,P See DL05 V-memory map
Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128
To Master Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

5-206 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECRX Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

(example continued on next page)

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-207
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECRX Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: Using ECOM100# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast
as possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in
slave K5.
Both the ECRX and ECWX work with the ECOM100 Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits”, or what
slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for
resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the ECRX and ECWX IBoxes in the same
rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same
scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program
would get a turn. If there are no pending ECOM100 IBoxes below the ECWX, then the very
next scan the ECRX would start its request again.
Using the ECRX and ECWX for all of your ECOM100 network reads and writes is the fastest
the PLC can do networking. For local Serial Ports, DCM modules, or the original ECOM
modules, use the NETCFG and NETRX/NETWX IBoxes.

5-208 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECOM100 WX Network Write(ECWX) (IB-741)

ECOM100 WX Network Write performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking
DS5 Used
with all other ECOM100 RX (ECRX) and ECOM100 WX (ECWX) IBoxes in your
HPP N/A program to simplify communications networking. It will perform the WX on the specified
ECOM100#’s network, which corresponds to
a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration
(ECOM100) IBox at the top of your program.
The Workspace parameter is an internal,
private register used by this IBox and MUST
BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and
MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will write
data from the master’s V-memory buffer to
the specified slave starting with the given slave
element, giving other ECOM100 RX and
ECOM100 WX IBoxes on that ECOM100# network a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from 5 different slaves, you can
have all of these ECRX and ECWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always On).
They will execute round-robin style, automatically.

ECWX Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Slave ID: specifies the slave ECOM(100) PLC that will
be targeted by the ECWX instruction
• From Master Element (Src): specifies the location in the master
ECOM100 PLC where the data will be sourced from
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to write to the slave ECOM(100) PLC
• To Slave Element (Dest): specifies the slave address the data will be written to
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
Parameter DL05 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-90
From Master Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128
To Slave Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V,P See DL05 V-memory map
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-209
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECWX Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130 byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.

5-210 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

ECWX Example
Rung 2: Using ECOM100# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast
as possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in
slave K5.
Both the ECRX and ECWX work with the ECOM100 Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits”, or what
slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for
resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the ECRX and ECWX IBoxes in the same
rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same
scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program
would get a turn. If there are no pending ECOM100 IBoxes below the ECWX, then the very
next scan the ECRX would start its request again.
Using the ECRX and ECWX for all of your ECOM100 network reads and writes is the fastest
the PLC can do networking. For local Serial Ports, DCM modules, or the original ECOM
modules, use the NETCFG and NETRX/NETWX IBoxes.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-211
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NETCFG Network Configuration (NETCFG) (IB-700)

DS5 Used Network Config defines all the common information necessary for performing RX/WX
HPP N/A Networking using the NETRX and NETWX IBox instructions via a local CPU serial port,
DCM or ECOM module.
You must have the Network Config instruction
at the top of your ladder/stage program with
any other configuration IBoxes.
If you use more than one local serial port,
DCM or ECOM in your PLC for RX/
WX Networking, you must have a different
Network Config instruction for EACH RX/
WX network in your system that utilizes any NETRX/NETWX IBox instructions.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by the Network Config IBox and
MUST BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.
The 2nd parameter “CPU Port or Slot” is the same value as in the high byte of the first LD
instruction if you were coding the RX or WX rung yourself. This value is CPU and port
specific (check your PLC manual). Use KF2 for the DL05 CPU serial port 2. If using a DCM
or ECOM module, use K1 for slot 1.

NETCFG Parameters
• Network#: specifies a unique # for each ECOM(100) or DCM network to use
• CPU Port or Slot: specifies the CPU port number or
slot number of DCM/ECOM(100) used
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction

Parameter DL05 Range

Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
CPU Port or Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-FF
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-212 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NETCFG Example
The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other Network
IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for each serial
port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your system.
Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF2). For local CPU
serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant
byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. Any
NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K0 for
their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-213
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Network RX Read (NETRX) (IB-701)

DS5 Used Network RX Read performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
HPP N/A Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify
communications networking. It will perform the RX on the specified Network #, which
corresponds to a specific unique Network
Configuration (NETCFG) at the top of your
program.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST
NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will read
element data from the specified slave into the
given destination V-memory buffer, giving other
Network RX and Network WX IBoxes on that
Network # a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from 5 different slaves, you can
have all of these NETRX and NETWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always
On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically.

NETRX Parameters
• Network#: specifies the (CPU port’s, DCM’s, ECOM’s)
Network # defined by the NETCFG instruction
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Slave ID: specifies the slave PLC that will be targeted by the NETRX instruction
• From Slave Element (Src): specifies the slave address of the data to be read
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to read from the slave device
• To Master Element (Dest): specifies the location where the
slave data will be placed in the master PLC
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
Parameter DL05 Range
Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-90
From Slave Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V,P See DL05 V-memory map
Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128
To Master Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

5-214 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NETRX Example
Rung 1: The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other
Network IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for
each serial port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your
system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF2). For local CPU
serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant
byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. Any
NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K0 for
their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.

(example continued on next page)

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-215
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NETRX Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: Using Network# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast as
possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in slave
K5.
Both the NETRX and NETWX work with the Network Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits”, or what
port number or slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other
interlocks for resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that
same scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the
program would get a turn. If there are no pending NETRX or NETWX IBoxes below this
IBox, then the very next scan the NETRX would start its request again.
Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, DCM, or original ECOM network
reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For ECOM100 modules, use the
ECOM100 and ECRX/ECWX IBoxes.

5-216 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Network WX Write (NETWX) (IB-702)

DS5 Used Network WX Write performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
HPP N/A Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify
communications networking. It will perform the WX on the specified Network #, which
corresponds to a specific unique Network Configuration (NETCFG) at the top of your
program.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will write data
from the master’s V-memory buffer to the specified
slave starting with the given slave element, giving
other Network RX and Network WX IBoxes on
that Network # a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from 5 different slaves, you can
have all of these NETRX and NETWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always
On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically.

NETWX Parameters
• Network#: specifies the (CPU port’s, DCM’s, ECOM’s)
Network # defined by the NETCFG instruction
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Slave ID: specifies the slave PLC that will be targeted by the NETWX instruction
• From Master Element (Src): specifies the location in the
master PLC where the data will be sourced from
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to write to the slave PLC
• To Slave Element (Dest): specifies the slave address the data will be written to
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
Parameter DL05 Range
Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-90
From Master Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1-128
To Slave Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V,P See DL05 V-memory map
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-217
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NETWX Example
Rung 1: The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other
Network IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for
each serial port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your
system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF2). For local CPU
serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant
byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. Any
NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K0 for
their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.

5-218 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

NETWX Example
Rung 2: Using Network# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast as
possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in slave
K5.
Both the NETRX and NETWX work with the Network Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits”, or what
port number or slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other
interlocks for resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that
same scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the
program would get a turn. If there are no pending NETRX or NETWX IBoxes below this
IBox, then the very next scan the NETRX would start its request again.
Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, DCM, or original ECOM network
reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For ECOM100 modules, use the
ECOM100 and ECRX/ECWX IBoxes.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-219
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Configuration (CTRIO) (IB-1000)

DS5 Used CTRIO Config defines all the common information for one specific CTRIO module which is
HPP N/A used by the other CTRIO IBox instructions (for example, CTRLDPR - CTRIO Load Profile,
CTREDRL - CTRIO Edit and Reload Preset Table, CTRRTLM - CTRIO Run to Limit
Mode, ...).
The Input/Output parameters for this instruction can be
copied directly from the CTRIO Workbench configuration for
this CTRIO module. Since the behavior is slightly different
when the CTRIO module is in an EBC Base via an ERM, you
must specify whether the CTRIO module is in a local base
or in an EBC base. The DL05 PLC only supports local base
operation at this time.
You must have the CTRIO Config IBox at the top of your
ladder/stage program along with any other configuration
IBoxes.
If you have more than one CTRIO in your PLC, you must have a different CTRIO Config
IBox for EACH CTRIO module in your system that utilizes any CTRIO IBox instructions.
Each CTRIO Config IBox must have a UNIQUE CTRIO# value. This is how the CTRIO
IBoxes differentiate between the different CTRIO modules in your system.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by the CTRIO Config IBox and
MUST BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your
program.

CTRIO Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a user defined number
• Slot: specifies the single PLC option slot the CTRIO module occupies
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• CTRIO Location: specifies where the module is located (local base only for DL05)
• Input: This needs to be set to the same V-memory register as is specified in
CTRIO Workbench as ‘Starting V address for inputs’ for this unique CTRIO.
• Output: This needs to be set to the same V-memory register as is specified in
CTRIO Workbench as ‘Starting V address for outputs’ for this unique CTRIO.

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K1
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Input ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Output ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-220 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-221
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table (CTRADPT) (IB-1005)

DS5 Used CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will
HPP N/A append an entry to the end of a memory based Preset Table on a specific CTRIO Output
resource. This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error
bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the
Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error Code
(CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.

CTRAPT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to be added to the end of a Preset Table
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL05 V-memory map
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

5-222 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRADPT Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRADPT command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRADPT instruction to add a new preset to the preset table for
output #0 on the CTRIO in slot 2. The new preset will be a command to RESET (entry type
K1=reset), pulse time is left at zero as the reset type does not use this, and the count at which
it will reset will be 20.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRADPT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in dataview, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on and stay on for all counts past 10. Now reset the counter with C1, enable C0 to execute
CTRADPT command to add a reset for output #0 at a count of 20, turn on C2 to enable
output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and then continue on
to count of 20+ (output #0 should turn off).

(Example continued on next page)

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-223
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRADPT Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.

Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.

5-224 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Clear Preset Table (CTRCLRT) (IB-1007)

DS5 Used CTRIO Clear Preset Table will clear the RAM based Preset Table on a leading edge transition
HPP N/A to this IBox. This IBox will take more than 1
PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error
bit will turn on when the command is complete.
If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO
Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get
extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by
this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.

CTRCLRT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-225
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRCLRT Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRCLRT command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRCLRT instruction to clear the preset table for output #0 on
the CTRIO in slot 2.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRCLRT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on and stay on until a count of 20 is reached, where it will turn off. Now reset the counter with
C1, enable C0 to execute CTRCLRT command to clear the preset table, turn on C2 to enable
output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should NOT turn on).

5-226 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRCLRT Example
Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.

Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-227
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (CTREDPT) (IB-1003)

DS5 Used CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will edit a single
HPP N/A entry in a Preset Table on a specific CTRIO Output resource. This IBox is good if you are
editing more than one entry in a file at a time. If you wish to do just one edit and then reload the
table immediately, see the CTRIO Edit and Reload Preset
Table Entry (CTREDRL) IBox. This IBox will take more
than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error
bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the
Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error Code
(CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.

CTREDPT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Table#: specifies the Table number of which an Entry is to be edited
• Entry#: specifies the Entry location in the Preset Table to be edited
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

5-228 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Table# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Entry# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL05 V-memory map
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

CTREDPT Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

(Example continued on next page)

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-229
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTREDPT Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTREDPT command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTREDPT instruction to change the second preset from a reset
at a count of 20 to a reset at a count of 30 for output #0 on the CTRIO in slot 2.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTREDPT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on and stay on until a count of 20 is reached, where it will turn off. Now reset the counter
with C1, enable C0 to execute CTREDPT command to change the second preset, turn on C2
to enable output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and then
continue past a count of 30 (output #0 should turn off).
Note that we must also reload the profile after changing the preset(s), this is why the CTRLDPR
command follows the CTREDPT command in this example.

5-230 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTREDPT Example
Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.

Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-231
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (CTREDRL) (IB-1002)

DS5 Used CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will
HPP N/A perform this dual operation to a CTRIO Output resource in one CTRIO command. This IBox
will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when
the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error Code
(CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.

CTREDRL Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Table#: specifies the Table number of which an Entry is to be edited
• Entry#: specifies the Entry location in the Preset Table to be edited
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

5-232 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Table# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Entry# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL05 V-memory map
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

CTREDRL Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

(example continued on next page)

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-233
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTREDRL Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTREDRL command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTREDRL instruction to change the second preset in file 1 from
a reset at a value of 20 to a reset at a value of 30.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTREDRL_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on, continue to a count above 20 and the output #0 light will turn off. Now reset the counter
with C1, enable C0 to execute CTREDRL command to change the second preset count value
to 30, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and continue on to a value
of 30+ and the output #0 light will turn off.
Note that it is not necessary to reload this file separately, however, the command can only
change one value at a time.

5-234 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTREDRL Example

Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.

Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-235
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINPT) (IB-1004)

DS5 Used CTRIO Initialize Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will create a single
HPP N/A entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a specific CTRIO Output resource. This
IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on
when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error
Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some
Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.

CTRINPT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

5-236 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-5; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL05 V-memory map
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

CTRINPT Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

(Example continued on next page)

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-237
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRINPT Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRINPT command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRINPT instruction to create a single entry preset table, but
not as a file, and use it for the output #0. In this case the single preset will be a set at a count
of 15 for output #0.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRINPT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 15 and output #0 light will not
come on. Now reset the counter with C1, enable C0 to execute CTRINPT command to create
a single preset table with a preset to set output#0 at a count of 15, then turn encoder to value
of 15+ (output #0 should turn on).

5-238 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRINPT Example

Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.

Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-239
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINTR) (IB-1010)

1 DS5 Used CTRIO Initialize Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will create a single
HPP N/A entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a specific CTRIO Output resource.This IBox
2 will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when
the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error Code
3 (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
4 K0: Set
K1: Reset
5 K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)

6 K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)

K4: Toggle
7 K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
8 The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
9
10 CTRINTR Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
11 user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
12 • Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the edit
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time for the Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
13 • Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin at after Reset

14 • Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction

• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
A • Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

B
C
D

5-240 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
1 DL05 Range
K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K 2 K0-3
K0-5; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-65535; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
3
K0-2147434528; See DL05 V-memory map
See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B 4 See DL05 V-memory map
See DL05 V-memory map

CTRINTR Example 5
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The 6
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
7
8
9
10
11
(Example continued on next page) 12
13
14
A
B
C
D

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-241
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRINTR Example (cont’d)

Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRINTR command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRINTR instruction to create a single entry preset table, but
not as a file, and use it for output #0, the new preset will be loaded when the current count is
reset. In this case the single preset will be a set at a count of 25 for output #0.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRINTR_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on. Now turn on C0 to execute the CTRINTR command, reset the counter with C1, then turn
encoder to value of 25+ (output #0 should turn on).

5-242 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRINTR Example

Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.

Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-243
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Load Profile (CTRLDPR) (IB-1001)

DS5 Used CTRIO Load Profile loads a CTRIO Profile File to a CTRIO Output resource on a leading
HPP N/A edge transition to this IBox. This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the
Success or Error bit will turn on when the command
is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the
CTRIO Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get
extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this
IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere
else in your program.

CTRLDPR Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• File#: specifies a CTRIO profile File number to be loaded
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
File# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-255; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

5-244 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRLDPR Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

Rung 2: This CTRIO Load Profile IBox will load File #1 into the working memory of Output
0 in CTRIO #1. This example program requires that you load CTRLDPR_IBox.cwb into your
Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

Rung 3: If the file is successfully loaded, set Profile_Loaded.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-245
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Read Error (CTRRDER) (IB-1014)

DS5 Used CTRIO Read Error Code will get the decimal error code value from the CTRIO module (listed
HPP N/A below) and place it into the given Error Code register, on a leading edge transition to the IBox
Since the Error Code in the CTRIO is only maintained until another CTRIO command is
given, you must use this instruction immediately after
the CTRIO IBox that reports an error via its Error bit
parameter.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox
instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in
your program.
Error Codes:
0: No Error
100: Specified command code is unknown or unsupported
101: File number not found in the file system
102: File type is incorrect for specified output function
103: Profile type is unknown
104: Specified input is not configured as a limit on this output
105: Specified limit input edge is out of range
106: Specified input function is unconfigured or invalid
107: Specified input function number is out of range
108: Specified preset function is invalid
109: Preset table is full
110: Specified Table entry is out of range
111: Specified register number is out of range
112: Specified register is an unconfigured input or output
2001: Error reading Error Code - cannot access CTRIO via ERM

CTRRDER Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config)
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words

5-246 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRRDER Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

Rung 2: This CTRIO Read Error Code IBox will read the Extended Error information from
CTRIO #1. This example program requires that you load CTRRDER_IBox.cwb into your
Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-247
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Run to Limit Mode (CTRRTLM) (IB-1011)

DS5 Used CTRIO Run To Limit Mode, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, loads the Run to Limit
HPP N/A command and given parameters on a specific Output resource. The CTRIO’s Input(s) must be
configured as Limit(s) for this function to work.
Valid Hexadecimal Limit Values:
K00 - Rising Edge of Ch1/C
K10 - Falling Edge of Ch1/C
K20 - Both Edges of Ch1/C
K01 - Rising Edge of Ch1/D
K11 - Falling Edge of Ch1/D
K21 - Both Edges of Ch1/D
K02 - Rising Edge of Ch2/C
K12 - Falling Edge of Ch2/C
K22 - Both Edges of Ch2/C
K03 - Rising Edge of Ch2/D
K13 - Falling Edge of Ch2/D
K23 - Both Edges of Ch2/D
This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn
on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error
Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.

CTRRTLM Parameters
• C
 TRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H0-CTRIO:
20Hz - 25kHz / H0-CTRIO2: 20Hz - 250kHz)
• Limit: the CTRIO’s Input(s) must be configured as Limit(s) for this function to operate
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time. This is a hex
number. Default of 0 is 50%, also entering 50 will yield 50%. 50%
duty cycle is defined as on half the time and off half the time
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

5-248 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K20-20000; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-FF; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-99; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

CTRRTLM Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

Rung 2: This CTRIO Run To Limit Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO #1 to output
pulses at a Frequency of 1000 Hz until Llimit #0 comes on. This example program requires
that you load CTRRTLM_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

(example continued on next page)

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-249
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRRTLM Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: If the Run To Limit Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the
output.

5-250 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Run to Position Mode (CTRRTPM) (IB-1012)

CTRIO Run To Position Mode, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, loads the Run to
DS5 Used Position command and given parameters on a specific Output resource.
HPP N/A
Valid Function Values are:
00: Less Than Ch1/Fn1
10: Greater Than Ch1/Fn1
01: Less Than Ch1/Fn2
11: Greater Than Ch1/Fn2
02: Less Than Ch2/Fn1
12: Greater Than Ch2/Fn1
03: Less Than Ch2/Fn2
13: Greater Than Ch2/Fn2
This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn
on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error
Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTRRTPM Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H0-CTRIO:
20Hz - 25KHz / H0-CTRIO2: 20Hz - 250 KHz)
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time. This is a hex
number. Default of 0 is 50%, also entering 50 will yield 50%. 50%
duty cycle is defined as on half the time and off half the time
• Position: specifies the count value, as measured on the encoder
input, at which the output pulse train will be turned off
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully
Parameter DL05 Range
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K20-20000; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-99; See DL05 V-memory map
Position ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL05 V-memory map
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-251
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRRTPM Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

Rung 2: This CTRIO Run To Position Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO #1 to
output pulses at a Frequency of 1000Hz, use the ‘Greater than Ch1/Fn1’ comparison operator,
until the input position of 1500 is reached. This example program requires that you load
CTRRTPM_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

Rung 3: If the Run To Position Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable
the output.

5-252 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Velocity Mode (CTRVELO) (IB-1013)

DS5 Used CTRIO Velocity Mode loads the Velocity command and given parameters on a specific
HPP N/A Output resource on a leading edge transition to this IBox.
This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either
the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command
is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO
Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error
information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox
instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in
your program.

CTRVELO Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a user defined number (see
CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H0-CTRIO: 20Hz - 25kHz / H0-CTRIO2:
20Hz–250kHz)
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time. This is a hex number. Default of
0 is 50%, also entering 50 will yield 50%. 50% duty cycle is defined as on half the time
and off half the time
• Step Count: This DWORD values specifies the number of pulses to output. A Step
Count value of -1 (or 0xFFFFFFFF) causes the CTRIO to output pulses continuously.
Negative Step Count values must be V-Memory references.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K20-20000; See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-99; See DL05 V-memory map
Step Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K K0-2147434528; See DL05 V-memory map
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-253
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRVELO Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

Rung 2: This CTRIO Velocity Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO #1 to output 10,000
pulses at a Frequency of 1000Hz. This example program requires that you load CTRVELO_
IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

5-254 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRVELO Example
Rung 3: If the Velocity Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the output.

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-255
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR) (IB-1006)

DS5 Used CTRIO Write File to ROM writes the runtime changes made to a loaded CTRIO Preset Table
HPP N/A back to Flash ROM on a leading edge transition to this IBox. This IBox will take more than
1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error
bit will turn on when the command is complete. If
the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read
Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error
information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this
IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere
else in your program.

CTRWFTR Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the instruction
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully

Parameter DL05 Range

CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-255
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K K0-3
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V See DL05 V-memory map - Data Words
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B See DL05 V-memory map

5-256 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRWFTR Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO card in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO in the system
will need a separate CTRIO I-box before any CTRxxxx I-boxes can be used for them. The
CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.

Rung 2: This CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry IBox will change Entry 0 in Table #2 to be a
RESET at Count 3456. This example program requires that you load CTRWFTR_IBox.cwb
into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.

(Example continued on next page)

DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E

5-257
 Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions

CTRWFTR Example (cont’d)

Rung 3: If the file is successfully edited, use a Write File To ROM IBox to save the edited table
back to the CTRIO’s ROM, thereby making the changes retentive.

5-258 DL05 Micro PLC User Manual, 6th Edition, Rev. E